This owner’s manual applies to the SX4 series

80J23-03E

This owner’s manual applies to the SX4 series:

80J2059

NOTE: The illustrated models are examples of the SX4 series.

© 2009 All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic ormechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Suzuki Motor Corporation.

SX4 SX4 SEDAN

80J23-03E

FOREWORD

All information in this manual is basedon the latest product information avail-able at the time of publication. Due toimprovements or other changes, theremay be discrepancies between informa-tion in this manual and your vehicle. SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATIONreserves the right to make productionchanges at any time, without notice andwithout incurring any obligation tomake the same or similar changes tovehicles previously built or sold.

SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATIONbelieves in conservation and protection ofEarth’s natural resources.

To that end, we encourage every vehicleowner to recycle, trade in, or properly dis-pose of, as appropriate, used motor oil,coolant, and other fluids, batteries andtires.

IF YOU HAVE ANY PROBLEMS WITHYOUR SUZUKI:

Please review the New Vehicle WarrantyInformation booklet supplied with yourSUZUKI. Should you have a question orproblem regarding the warranty or serviceof your vehicle, please take the followingaction:

Consult the Service Manager and theOwner of the Suzuki Automotive Dealer-ship. Explain your problem and ask fortheir assistance in resolving your problem.The Owner of the dealership is in the verybest position to assist you as he or she isvitally concerned with your continued satis-faction.

If you are still in need of additional informa-tion, or if you are dissatisfied, request thatyour dealer arrange a meeting with yourDistrict Service Manager.

If, after doing so, you still require furtherassistance, and you purchased yourSUZUKI in the continental United States,please contact the American Suzuki Cus-tomer Relations Department by telephoneat 1-800-934-0934 or in writing at:

American Suzuki Motor CorporationAutomotive Customer Relations3251 East Imperial HighwayBrea, CA 92821-6795

If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canadaplease contact the Suzuki Canada Cus-tomer Relations Department by telephoneat 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or inwriting at:

Suzuki Canada Inc.Customer Relations100 East Beaver Creek RoadRichmond Hill, OnL4B 1J6

In the event you require assistance relatedto your SUZUKI, while temporarily travel-ling in either the United States or Canada,you may wish to contact the Suzuki Cus-tomer Relations Department directly of thecountry in which you are temporarily oper-ating your vehicle.

Please be certain to provide us with the fol-lowing information: the model, VehicleIdentification Number, mileage, accesso-ries involved, event dates, your concern,and any other comments which you mayhave. When we receive your correspon-dence, we will be pleased to contact theOwner of your dealership and assist inresolving your concern.

For owners outside the continental UnitedStates, please refer to the distributor’saddress listed in your Warranty Informationbooklet.

80J23-03E

IMPORTANTWARNING/CAUTION/NOTE

Please read this manual and follow itsinstructions carefully. To emphasize spe-cial information, the symbol and thewords WARNING, CAUTION and NOTEhave special meanings. Pay special atten-tion to the messages highlighted by thesesignal words:

NOTE:Indicates special information to makemaintenance easier or instructions clearer.

75F135

The circle with a slash in this manualmeans “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-pen”.

MODIFICATION WARNING

WARNINGIndicates a potential hazard thatcould result in death or injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potential hazard thatcould result in vehicle damage.

WARNINGDo not modify this vehicle. Modifica-tion could adversely affect safety,handling, performance or durabilityand may violate governmental regula-tions. In addition, damage or perfor-mance problems resulting frommodification may not be coveredunder warranty.

CAUTIONImproper installation of mobile com-munication equipment such as cellu-lar telephones or CB (Citizen’s Band)radios may cause electronic interfer-ence with your vehicle’s ignition sys-tem, resulting in vehicle performanceproblems. Consult your SUZUKIdealer or qualified service technicianfor advice on installing such mobilecommunication equipment.

80J23-03E

LEAK DETECTION PUMPNOTE:Your vehicle has a pump to regularly checkthe vehicle’s evaporative emission controlsystem for leaks. This check is performedapproximately five hours after the engine isturned off. During this leak check, you mayhear a sound coming from the vehicle forseveral minutes. This sound is normal anddoes not indicate a malfunction.

80J23-03E

MEMO

80J23-03E

INTRODUCTIONThank you for choosing SUZUKI and welcome to our growing family. Your choice was a wise one; SUZUKI products are a great valuethat will give you years of driving pleasure.

This Owner’s Manual was prepared to help you have a safe, enjoyable, and trouble-free experience with your SUZUKI. In it you will learnabout the vehicle’s operation, its safety features and maintenance requirements. Please read it carefully before operating your vehicle.Afterwards, keep this Manual in the glove box for future reference.

Should you resell the vehicle, please leave this Manual with it for the next owner.

In addition to the Owner’s Manual, the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI explain the vehicle’s warranties. We recommend youread them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information.

When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI, we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealership. Their fac-tory-trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories.

80J23-03E

SERVICE STATION GUIDE1. Fuel (see section 1)2. Engine hood (see section 5)3. Tire changing tools (see section 8)4. Engine oil dipstick <Yellow>

(see section 7)5. CVT fluid dipstick <Red or Orange>

(see section 7)6. Engine coolant (see section 7)7. Windshield washer fluid

(see section 7)8. Battery (see section 7)9. Tire pressure (see Tire Information

Label on driver’s door lock pillar)10. Spare tire (see section 7)

80J2007

2

2

7

19

3

10

8

4

6 5

80J23-03E

TABLE OF CONTENTS

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNINGEngine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and certain product compo-nents contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1

BEFORE DRIVING 2

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3

DRIVING TIPS 4

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7

EMERGENCY SERVICE 8

APPEARANCE CARE 9

GENERAL INFORMATION 10

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS 11

SPECIFICATIONS 12

INDEX 13

ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

80J23-03E

EXTERIOR1. Rear Window Wiper (if equipped)

(P.2-80)2. High-mount Stop Light (if equipped)

(P.7-45)3. Radio Antenna (P.5-15)4. Engine Hood (P.5-44)5. Head Light (P2-75, P7-41)6. Windshield Wiper (P.2-78)7. Roof Rail (if equipped) (P.5-55)8. Fuel Filler Cap (P.5-43)9. License Plate Light (P.7-44)

10. Tailgate (if equipped) (P.2-3)11. Rear Combination Light (P.7-43)12. Front Fog Light (if equipped)

(P.2-77, 7-42)13. Outside Rearview Mirror (P.2-20)14. Door Locks (P.2-1)15. Trunk (if equipped) (P.2-4)

80J2058

1

15

1413

84

3

32 5 6 7SX4

SX4 SEDAN

10 119 12

EXAMPLE


80J23-03E

INTERIOR1. Seat Belts (P.2-28)2. Side Curtain Air Bags (if equipped)

(P.2-50)3. Interior Light (P.5-45, 7-40)4. Assist Grip (if equipped) (P.5-48)5. Power Mirror Control Switch

(if equipped) (P.2-20)/Power Window Controls (P.2-17)

6. Sun Visor (P.5-45)7. Spot Light (P.5-47, 7-40)8. Inside Rearview Mirror (P.2-19)9. Luggage Compartment Light

(if equipped) (P.5-46, 7-45)10. Luggage Compartment Cover

(if equipped) (P.5-52)11. Rear Seat (P.2-24)12. Side Air Bags (if equipped) (P.2-50)13. Armrest (if equipped) (P. 5-51)14. Parking Brake Lever (P.3-6)15. Front Seats (P.2-21)16. Gearshift Lever (P.3-10)

80J2062

1 42 53 6

10 11 1413 15 1612

7 8

9

EXAMPLE


80J23-03E

INSTRUMENT PANEL1. Lighting Control Lever (P.2-75)/

Turn Signal Control Lever (P.2-77)2. Shift Paddles (if equipped) (P.3-14)3. Front Air Bags (P.2-49)4. Instrument Cluster (P.2-59)5. Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever

(P.2-78)/Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch (if equipped) (P.2-80)

6. Hazard Warning Switch (P.2-78)7. Audio (P.5-15)8. Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped)

(P.2-77)9. Fuse Box (P.7-36)

10. Engine Hood Release Handle (P.5-44)

11. Remote Audio Controls (if equipped) (P.5-37)

12. Ignition Switch (P.3-2)13. Cruise Control Switch (if equipped)

(P.3-18)14. Heating and Air Conditioning System

(P.5-1)15. Accessory Socket (if equipped)

(P.5-47)/Cigarette Lighter (if equipped) (P.5-47)

16. Heated Rear Window and HeatedOutside Rearview Mirrors Switch (if equipped) (P.2-81)

17. Glove Box (P.5-49)18. ESP OFF Switch (if equipped)

(P.3-26)19. 2WD/i-AWD (intelligent All Wheel

Drive) Switch (if equipped) (P.3-16)20. Front Seat Heater Switch

(if equipped) (P.2-23) 80J2074

1

9

18

32 4 5 6 7 3

12 13 14 15 16 1710 118

19

20 20

EXAMPLE


80J23-03E

TIRE CHANGING TOOL1. Jack Handle (P.8-1)2. Wheel Brace (P.8-1)3. Spare Tire (P.7-31, 8-1)4. Jack (P.8-1)

80JM121

1 2

2 1

SX4

SX4 SEDAN3 4

4 3 EXAMPLE

80J23-03E

LOCATION OF WARNINGMESSAGESRead and follow all of the warnings (labelsetc.) on your vehicle. Make sure youunderstand all of them. Keep them on thevehicle. Do not remove the messages forany reason. If a label comes off or themessages become difficult to be read,have it corrected by your SUZUKI dealer.

1. Air bag warning labels (on both sun visors)

2. Jacking warning label3. Fuel filler cap message4. Brake fluid cap message5. Engine cooling fan warning label6. Radiator cap warning label7. Air conditioner warning label8. Battery label9. Compact spare tire warning label

10. Side air bag warning label11. Luggage compartment cover warning

label12. Jacking instruction warning label

80J2075

4

6

5

7

2

11

10

3

8

1

9

10 10

12

Driver Passenger

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

1

80J23-03E

65D394

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONFuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1

1-1

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

80J23-03E

Fuel Recommendation

60A004

Your vehicle requires regular unleadedgasoline with a minimum rating of 87 pumpoctane ((R + M)/2 method). In some areas,the only fuels that are available are oxy-genated fuels.

Oxygenated fuels which meet the mini-mum octane requirement and the require-ments described below may be used inyour vehicle without jeopardizing the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE:Oxygenated fuels are fuels which containoxygen-carrying additives such as MTBEor alcohol.

Gasoline Containing MTBEUnleaded gasoline containing MTBE(methyl tertiary butyl ether) may be used inyour vehicle if the MTBE content is notgreater than 15%. This oxygenated fueldoes not contain alcohol.

Gasoline/Ethanol blendsBlends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol(grain alcohol), also known as gasohol,may be used in your vehicle if the ethanolcontent is not greater than 10%.

Gasoline/Methanol blendsFuels containing 5% or less methanol(wood alcohol) may be suitable for use inyour vehicle if they contain cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors. Do NOT USE fuelscontaining more than 5% methanol underany circumstances. Fuel system damageor vehicle performance problems resultingfrom the use of such fuels are not theresponsibility of SUZUKI and may not becovered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Fuel Pump LabelingIn some states, pumps that dispense oxy-genated fuels are required to be labeled forthe type and percentage of oxygenate andwhether important additives are present.Such labels may provide enough informa-tion for you to determine if a particularblend of fuel meets the requirements listedabove. In other areas, pumps may not beclearly labeled as to the content or type ofoxygenate and additives. If you are notsure that the fuel you intend to use meetsthese requirements, check with the servicestation operator or the fuel supplier.

NOTE:To help clean the air, SUZUKI recom-mends you use the oxygenated fuels.However, if you are not satisfied with thedriveability or fuel economy of your vehiclewhen you are using an oxygenated fuel,switch back to the regular unleaded gaso-line.

CAUTIONBe careful not to spill fuel containingalcohol while refueling. If fuel isspilled on the vehicle body, wipe it upimmediately. Fuels containing alco-hol can cause paint damage, which isnot covered under the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Fuel Recommendation: 1, 2

BEFORE DRIVING

2

80J23-03E

60G404

BEFORE DRIVINGKeys ...................................................................................... 2-1Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-1Keyless Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter .................................... 2-6Theft Deterrent Light ........................................................... 2-17Windows .............................................................................. 2-17Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-19Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-21Front Seat Heater (if equipped) .......................................... 2-23Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-24Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-28Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 2-47Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 2-59Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-60Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-68Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-69Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-69Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-70Information display ............................................................. 2-70Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-75Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped) ................................ 2-77Turn Signal Control Lever .................................................. 2-77Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 2-78Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 2-78Tilt Steering Lock Lever (if equipped) ............................... 2-81Horn ...................................................................................... 2-81Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors (if equipped) Switch ............................................... 2-81

2-1

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Keys

54G489

Your vehicle comes with a pair of identicalkeys. Keep the spare key in a safe place.One key can open all of the locks on thevehicle.

The key identification number is stampedon a metal tag provided with the keys.Keep the tag in a safe place. If you loseyour keys, you will need this number tohave new keys made. Write the numberbelow for your future reference.

Ignition Key ReminderA buzzer sounds to remind you to removethe ignition key if it is in the ignition switchwhen the driver’s door is opened.

Door Locks

Side Door Locks

60A009

To lock a front door from outside the vehi-cle:• Insert the key and turn the top of the key

toward the rear of the vehicle, or• Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and

hold the door handle as you close thedoor.

To unlock a front door from outside thevehicle, insert the key and turn the top ofthe key toward the front of the vehicle.

79J021

To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turnthe lock knob forward. Turn the lock knobrearward to unlock the door.

To lock a rear door from outside the vehi-cle, turn the lock knob forward and closethe door. You do not need to pull and holdthe door handle as you close the door.

KEY NUMBER:

EXAMPLE WARNINGAlways lock all doors when driving.Locking the doors helps to preventoccupants from being thrown fromthe vehicle in the event of an acci-dent. It also helps prevent unin-tended opening of the doors.

Rear

Front

UNLOCK

LOCK

UNLOCK LOCKEXAMPLE

Keys: 8Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-2

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Power Door Locking SystemYou can lock and unlock all the doors(including the tailgate of SX4) simulta-neously by:• Turning the key in a front door lock, or• Pushing the power door locking switch

located on the driver’s side or the frontpassenger’s side door panel.

54G294

(when using the key)To lock all the doors simultaneously, insertthe key in a front door lock and turn the topof the key toward the rear of the vehicleonce.

To unlock all the doors simultaneously,insert the key in a front door lock and turnthe top of the key toward the front of thevehicle twice.

To unlock only one of the front doors, insertthe key in that door lock and turn the top ofthe key toward the front of the vehicleonce.

Driver’s side

80JC091

Front passenger’s side

80JC092

(when using the power door lockingswitch)To lock or unlock all the doors simulta-neously, depress the front or rear of theswitch (1) or (2), respectively.

LOCK

Rear

Front

UNLOCK

(1)

UNLOCK LOCK

EXAMPLE(2)

EXAMPLE

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-3

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

NOTE:• If your vehicle is equipped with the key-

less entry system, you can also lock orunlock all doors by operating the remotecontroller/transmitter. Refer to “KeylessStart System Remote Controller/Key-less Entry System Transmitter” in thissection.

• If your vehicle is equipped with the key-less start system, you can also lock orunlock all doors by pushing the requestswitch on the door handle. Refer to “Key-less Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter” inthis section.

Child Lock System (rear doors)

80JM019

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK

Each of the rear doors is equipped with achild lock which can be used to help pre-vent unwanted opening of the door frominside the vehicle. When the lock lever is inthe “LOCK” position (1), the rear door canonly be opened from outside. When thelock lever is in the “UNLOCK” position (2),the rear door can be opened from inside oroutside.

Tailgate (SX4)

80JC059

(1) Tailgate unlatch switch

You can lock and unlock the tailgate byusing the key in the driver’s door lock.

To open the tailgate, push and hold the tail-gate unlatch switch (1) and lift the tailgate.

NOTE:When the tailgate is closed incompletely,follow the procedure below:1) Push the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and

open the tailgate a little.2) After a few seconds, close the tailgate.3) Make sure that the tailgate is closed

completely.

WARNINGBe sure to place the child lock in the“LOCK” position whenever childrenare seated in the rear.

EXAMPLE

(2)

(1)(1)

EXAMPLE

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-4

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

If you cannot unlatch the tailgate by push-ing the unlatch switch (1) due to a dis-charged battery or malfunction, follow theprocedures below to unlatch the tailgatefrom inside the vehicle.1) Fold the rear seat forward for easier

access. Refer to “Folding Rear Seats”section for details on how to fold therear seat forward.

80J092

2) Push open the tailgate from inside bypushing up on the emergency lever (2)using a flat blade screwdriver or thejack handle. The tailgate will be latchedagain by closing the tailgate simply.

If the tailgate cannot be unlatched by push-ing the unlatch switch (1), have the vehicleinspected by your SUZUKI dealer.

Trunk Lid (SX4 SEDAN)

55KS005

If your vehicle is equipped with a trunk lidkey lock, you can open the trunk lid byusing the key in the trunk lid lock. To openthe trunk lid, insert the key and turn itclockwise to unlatch and lift the trunk lid.

WARNINGAlways make sure that the tailgate isclosed and latched securely. Com-pletely closing the tailgate helps pre-vent occupants from being thrownfrom the vehicle in the event of anaccident. Completely closing it alsohelps keep exhaust gases from enter-ing the car.

WARNING• To avoid injury, do not use your fin-

ger to push the emergency lever.• Make sure there is no one near the

tailgate when pushing open the tail-gate from inside the vehicle.

(2)

CAUTIONDo not use the key to lift up the lid, orthe key may break off in the lock.

EXAMPLE

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-5

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

56KN010

If your vehicle is equipped with a trunk lidunlatch switch (1), push and hold the trunklid unlatch switch (1) and lift the trunk lid toopen the trunk lid.

The trunk lid unlatch switch (1) operateswhen the keyless start system remote con-troller is within the switch’s operatingrange.The trunk lid unlatch switch (1) operatesonly to open the trunk lid.If you close the trunk lid with the keylessstart system remote controller left in thetrunk with all the doors locked, the trunkwill be automatically unlatched.

80JC005

You can unlock the lid by pulling therelease lever located to the outboard sideof the driver’s seat.

Internal Trunk Release (SX4 SEDAN)

54G297

There is a release lever located inside thetrunk, on the rear part of the trunk lid. Thislever is for emergency use so that if a per-son, such as a child, gets trapped in thetrunk compartment, he can exit the vehicle.The lever glows in the dark, after a briefexposure to ambient light, so it can befound easily. It is operated by pushing itdown in the direction of the arrow.

(1)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGAlways make sure that the trunk lid isclosed and latched securely. Other-wise, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving. Completely closing it alsohelps keep exhaust gases from enter-ing the car.

WARNINGTo help avoid situations where some-one might get trapped in the trunk,keep your vehicle locked when unat-tended, and do not allow anyone toplay in the trunk.

EXAMPLE

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-6

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Keyless Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter

66J111

Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-less start system remote controller (TypeA) or a keyless entry system transmitter(Type B). The remote controller has a key-less entry system and a keyless start sys-tem. The transmitter has only a keylessentry system. For details, refer to the fol-lowing explanations.

Keyless Start System Remote Controller (Type A)The remote controller enables the followingoperations:• You can lock or unlock the doors by

operating the LOCK/UNLOCK buttonson the remote controller. Refer to theexplanation in this section.

• You can lock or unlock the doors bypushing the request switch on the doorhandle. For details, refer to the explana-tion in this section.

• You can start the engine without usingan ignition key. For details, refer to “Igni-tion Switch” in the “OPERATING YOURVEHICLE” section.

66J114

(1) “LOCK” button(2) “UNLOCK” button(3) “PANIC” button

“LOCK” button (1) / “UNLOCK” button(2) functionYou can lock or unlock all doors (includingthe tailgate of SX4) simultaneously byoperating the remote controller near thevehicle.

• To lock the doors, push the “LOCK” but-ton (1).

• To unlock the driver’s door, push the“UNLOCK” button (2) once.

• To unlock other doors, wait a second ortwo, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2)a second time. If you “double-click” toofast, the doors will not unlock.

The turn signal lights will flash once whenthe doors are locked.

When the doors are unlocked:• The turn signal lights will flash twice.• If the interior light switch is in the

“DOOR” position, the interior light willturn on for about 15 seconds and thenfade out. If you push in the ignitionswitch or insert the key during this time,the light will start to fade out immedi-ately.

Be sure the doors are locked after youoperate the “LOCK” button (1). If no door is opened within about 30 sec-onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) isoperated, the doors will automatically lockagain.

Type A Type B

(1)

(2)

(3)

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-7

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

NOTE:• The maximum operating distance of the

remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.),but this can vary depending on the sur-roundings, especially near other trans-mitting devices such as radio towers orCB (Citizen’s Band) radios.

• The door locks cannot be operated withthe remote controller if the ignition switchis in a position other than “LOCK”, or theignition key is inserted in the ignitionswitch, or if any door is open. If any door is open, you cannot lock thedoor by operating the remote controller,however unlock the door.

• You cannot lock the door unless all of thedoor are closed completely.

• If you lose one of the remote controllers,ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-sible for a replacement. Be sure to haveyour dealer program the new remotecontroller code in your vehicle’s memoryso that the old code is erased, or per-form the programming procedure your-self according to the instructions in thissection.

“PANIC” button (3) functionThis function is to get the attention of oth-ers.Press the “PANIC” button (3) for more than1 second. The headlights and taillights willblink for about 30 seconds. Also, the hornwill sound intermittently for about 30 sec-onds at the same time.To cancel the “PANIC” mode, press anybutton (PANIC, LOCK or UNLOCK) on theremote controller. You can also insert thekey in the ignition switch and turn to the“ON” position to cancel the “PANIC” mode.

NOTE:The “PANIC” button function will not acti-vate when the key is in the ignition switch.

Keyless unlocking/locking using therequest switches

SX4

80JC054

SX4 SEDAN

56KN008

(1)EXAMPLE

(1) EXAMPLE

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-8

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

When the remote controller is within theoperating range described in this section,you can lock or unlock the doors by push-ing the request switch (1) on the door han-dle of the driver’s door, front passenger’sdoor or tailgate of SX4.

To lock all doors when all doors areunlocked:• Push the request switch on one of the

door handles once.


To unlock a door or all doors:• Push the request switch on the door

handle once to unlock only one door.• Push the request switch on the door

handle twice to unlock all doors.


“DOOR” position, the interior light willturn on for about 15 seconds and thenfade out. If you push in the ignitionswitch or insert the key during this time,the light will start to fade out immedi-ately.

Be sure the doors are locked after youoperate the request switch to lock thedoors.

NOTE:• The door locks cannot be operated by

the request switch under the followingconditions: – If any door is open or is not completely

closed.– If the ignition switch is in a position

other than “LOCK”.– If the ignition key is inserted in the igni-

tion switch.• If no doors are opened within about 30

seconds after unlocking the doors bypushing the request switch, the doorswill be locked again automatically.

80JM020

(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)

When the remote controller is withinapproximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from afront door handle or the tailgate switch, youcan lock or unlock the doors by pushingthe request switch.

NOTE:• If the remote controller is outside the

request switch operating rangedescribed above, you will not be able tooperate the request switch.

• If the battery of the remote controllerruns down or there are strong radiowaves or noise, the request switch oper-ating range may be reduced or theremote controller may be inoperative.

• If the remote controller is too close to thedoor glass, the request switches may notoperate.

• If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-cle, the request switches may not oper-ate normally.

• The remote controller will only operate arequest switch if it is within the switch’soperating range. For example, if theremote controller is within the operatingrange of the driver’s door request switchbut not the front passenger’s doorrequest switch or the tailgate requestswitch, the driver’s door switch can beoperated but the front passenger’s doorswitch or tailgate switch cannot be oper-ated.

(1)

(1)

(1)

EXAMPLE

Windows: 3, 8

2-9

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

NOTE:The keyless start system may not functioncorrectly in certain environments or undercertain operating conditions such as thefollowing:• When there are strong signals coming

from a television, power station or a cel-lular phone.

• When the remote controller is in contactwith or covered by a metal object.

• When a radio wave type remote keylessentry is used nearby.

• When the remote controller is placednear an electronic device such as per-sonal computer.

Some additional precautions you shouldtake and information you should be awareof are: • Make sure the ignition key is stowed in

the remote controller. If the remote con-troller becomes unreliable, you will notbe able to lock or unlock the doors orstart the engine.

• Be sure that the driver always carries theremote controller.

• If you lose one of the remote controllers,ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-sible for a replacement. Be sure to haveyour dealer program the new remotecontroller code in your vehicle’s memoryso that the old code is erased, or per-form the programming procedure your-self according to the instructions in thissection.

• You can use up to four remote controllersand ignition keys for your vehicle. Askyour SUZUKI dealer for details.

• The battery life of the remote controlleris about two years, but it can varydepending on usage conditions.

80JC026

To stow the ignition key into the remotecontroller, push the key in the remote con-troller until you hear a click.

80JC027

To remove the key from the remote control-ler, push the button (A) in the direction ofthe arrow and pull the key out from theremote controller.

CAUTIONThe remote controller is a sensitiveelectronic instrument. To avoid dam-aging the remote controller:• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such as byleaving it on the dashboard underdirect sunlight.

• Keep the remote controller awayfrom magnetic objects such as atelevision.

(A)

Windows: 3, 8

2-10

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Reminder function

80J2016

If the remote controller is not in the vehicleunder the following conditions, a buzzersounds intermittently for about 2 secondsand the keyless start system indicator lighton the instrument cluster blinks in red:• When the vehicle speed is over 10 km/h

(6 mph).• When one or more doors are opened

and all of the doors are later closed withthe ignition switch in a position otherthan “LOCK”.

The red indicator light will turn off withinseveral seconds after the remote controlleris returned to an area of the vehicle otherthan the rear luggage area.

If the remote controller is left in the vehicleand you lock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door as described below, the doorwill be automatically unlocked.

• If you open the driver’s door and lock thedoor by turning the lock knob forward orpushing the power door locking switch,the driver’s door will be automaticallyunlocked.

• If you open a door other than the driver’sdoor and lock the front passenger’s doorby turning the lock knob forward or push-ing the power door locking switch, thefront passenger’s door will be automati-cally unlocked.

For SX4 SEDAN, if you close the trunk lidwith the remote controller left in the trunkwith all the doors locked, the trunk will beautomatically unlatched.

NOTE:• The reminder will not operate when the

remote controller is on the instrumentpanel, in the glove box, in a storagecompartment, in the sun visor or on thefloor etc.

• Be sure that the driver always carries theremote controller.

• Do not leave the remote controller in thevehicle when leaving the vehicle.

Replacement of the batteryIf the remote controller becomes unreli-able, replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the remote con-troller:

66J016

1) Insert a flat blade screwdriver coveredwith a soft cloth in the slot of the remotecontroller and pry it open.

EXAMPLE

Windows: 3, 8Mirrors: 3, 8

2-11

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

80J2076

(1) Lithium disc type battery: CR2032 or equivalent

2) Replace the battery (1) so its + terminalfaces the bottom of the case as shownin the illustration.

3) Close the remote controller firmly.4) Make sure the door locks can be oper-

ated with the remote controller.5) Dispose of the used battery properly

according to applicable rules or regula-tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-ies with ordinary household trash.

Programming/erasing the remote con-troller code yourselfYour new vehicle was originally equippedwith two remote controllers.

If you have lost one of the remote control-lers, you should change the remote con-troller code in your vehicle’s memory assoon as possible for security. If you pur-chase additional remote controllers, thenew remote controllers need to be pro-grammed into your vehicle’s memory. Youcan perform this yourself by using the fol-lowing procedure:

NOTE:• You can program up to four remote con-

troller codes into your vehicle’s memory.The four codes may be the same or dif-ferent.

• If you try to program a fifth code, the fourremote controller codes that are pro-grammed will be cleared automatically.

• If you program a new remote controllercode, all of the old remote controllercodes that are in your vehicle’s memorywill be erased automatically. When youprogram a new remote controller, youshould reprogram any additional remotecontrollers at the same time.

• To purchase new remote controllers, seeyour SUZUKI dealer.

• Before you begin programming, have allof your remote controllers available.

(1)

WARNINGSwallowing a lithium battery maycause serious internal injury. Do notallow anyone to swallow a lithiumbattery. Keep lithium batteries awayfrom children and pets. If swallowed,contact a physician immediately.

CAUTIONThe transmitter/remote controller is asensitive electronic instrument. Toavoid damaging it, do not expose it todust or moisture or tamper with inter-nal parts.

Mirrors: 3, 8Seat Adjustment: 3

2-12

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

To program a new remote controller1) Close all the doors of the vehicle.2) Sit in the driver’s seat and confirm that

the driver’s door is unlocked.3) Insert the key into the ignition switch.4) Complete steps 1 through 6 described

below within 25 seconds after step 3).

80JC093

1. Push the power door locking switchof the driver’s door to the lock posi-tion and then push it to the unlock (2)position.

2. Repeat step 1 two more times.3. Push the power door locking switch

of the driver’s door to the lock (1)position.

4. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch and then insert it again.

5. Repeat step 4 three more times.6. To start the engine, turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position.Wait for 3 seconds.

7. Proceed to step 5) within 60 secondsafter the engine has started.

NOTE:You cannot program the remote controllerif you don’t complete steps 1 through 6within 25 seconds.You cannot program the remote controllerif you do not proceed to step 5) within 60seconds after the engine has started.

5) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position.A buzzer will sound twice and the doorlock switch will be activated from thelock position to the unlock positionautomatically.

6) Press the “LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or“PANIC” button on the remote controller.A buzzer will sound twice and the doorlock switch will be activated from thelock position to the unlock positionautomatically.If you want to program an additionalremote controller, repeat the procedureof step 6) using the additional remotecontroller.

NOTE:Complete step 6) within 30 seconds.You can program up to four remote control-lers.

7) To complete programming, remove thekey from the ignition switch or turn theignition switch to the “ON” position.

8) Make sure that the keyless start systemand keyless entry system operate prop-erly by operating each remote control-ler.

If you cannot operate the keyless start sys-tem and/or keyless entry system, repeatthis programming procedure again.If you still cannot operate the systems, seeyour SUZUKI dealer.

UNLOCK (2)

LOCK (1)

Seat Adjustment: 3

2-13

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

To change the old remote controllercodes in your vehicle’s memoryIf you have lost one of the remote control-lers, you should change the remote con-troller codes in your vehicle’s memory assoon as possible for security.To erase the remote controller code(s) inyour vehicle’s memory, you should pro-gram the new remote controller code. Theold codes in your vehicle’s memory will beerased automatically. If you have moreremote controller(s), you must program allof the remote controller codes at the sametime. You cannot operate the keyless startsystem and keyless entry system usingany remote controller that is not pro-grammed at the same time.For details on how to program, refer to theprogramming procedure in this section.When you complete programming, makesure that the keyless start system and key-less entry system operate properly byoperating each remote controller.

1. For USAThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

2. For CanadaThis device complies with Industry CanadaStandard RSS-210. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1) This device may not cause interference,

and2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of thedevice.

The term “IC:” before the certification/reg-istration number only signifies that theIndustry Canada technical specificationswere met.

Keyless Entry System Transmitter (Type B)

52D209

(1) “LOCK” button(2) “UNLOCK” button(3) “PANIC” button

“LOCK” button (1) / “UNLOCK” button(2) functionYou can lock or unlock all doors (includingthe tailgate of SX4) simultaneously byoperating the transmitter near the vehicle.

• To lock the doors, push the “LOCK” but-ton (1).

• To unlock the driver’s door, push the“UNLOCK” button (2) once.

• To unlock other doors, wait a second ortwo, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2)a second time. If you “double-click” toofast, the doors will not unlock.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Seat Adjustment: 3Head Restraints: 3

2-14

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E



“DOOR” position, the interior light willturn on for about 15 seconds and thenfade out. If you insert the key into theignition switch during this time, the lightwill start to fade out immediately.

Be sure the doors are locked after youoperate the “LOCK” button (1). If no door is opened within about 30 sec-onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) isoperated, the doors will automatically lockagain.

NOTE:• The maximum operating distance of the

keyless entry system transmitter is about5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary dependingon the surroundings, especially nearother transmitting devices such as radiotowers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.

• The door locks cannot be operated withthe transmitter, if the ignition key isinserted in the ignition switch.

• If you lose one of the transmitters, askyour SUZUKI dealer as soon as possiblefor a replacement. Be sure to have yourdealer program the new transmitter codein your vehicle’s memory so that the oldcode is erased, or perform the program-ming procedure yourself according to theinstructions in this section.

“PANIC” button (3) functionThis function is to get the attention of oth-ers.Press the “PANIC” button (3) for more than1 second. The headlights and taillights willblink for about 30 seconds. Also, the hornwill sound intermittently for about 30 sec-onds at the same time.To cancel the “PANIC” mode, press anybutton (PANIC, LOCK or UNLOCK) on thetransmitter. You can also insert the key inthe ignition switch and turn to the “ON”position to cancel the “PANIC” mode.

NOTE:The “PANIC” button function will not acti-vate when the key is in the ignition switch.

Replacement of the batteryIf the transmitter becomes unreliable,replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the transmitter:

52D210

1) Put the edge of a coin or a flat bladescrewdriver in the slot of the transmitterand pry it open.

CAUTIONThe transmitter is a sensitive elec-tronic instrument. To avoid damagingthe transmitter:• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-


• Keep the transmitter away frommagnetic objects such as a televi-sion.

Head Restraints: 3Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-15

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

80J2077

(1) Lithium disc type battery: CR2025 or equivalent

2) Replace the battery (1) so its + terminalfaces the “+” mark of the transmitter.

3) Close the transmitter firmly.4) Make sure the door locks can be oper-

ated with the transmitter.5) Dispose of the used battery properly

according to applicable rules or regula-tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-ies with ordinary household trash.

Programming/removing a transmittercode yourselfYour new vehicle was originally equippedwith two transmitters.

If you have lost one of the transmitters, youshould change the transmitter code in yourvehicle’s memory as soon as possible forsecurity. If you purchase additional trans-mitters, the new transmitters need to beprogrammed into your vehicle’s memory.You can perform this yourself by using thefollowing procedure:

NOTE:• You can program up to three transmitter

codes into your vehicle’s memory. Thethree codes may be the same or differ-ent.

• If you try to program a fourth code, theoldest code will be cleared automatically.

• To purchase new transmitters, see yourSUZUKI dealer.

• Before you begin programming, have allof your transmitters available.

To program a new transmitter1) Confirm that all the doors are closed

and the ignition key is out of the ignitionswitch.

2) Open the driver’s door.3) Insert the key, turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position, turn the ignitionswitch to the “LOCK” position andremove the key within 10 seconds.

66J018

4) Push and release the driver’s doorswitch (1) 3 times, insert the key, andturn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-tion within 20 seconds.

5) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position and remove the key within 10seconds. All doors will lock/unlock toconfirm that this procedure has beenproperly completed.

WARNINGSwallowing a lithium battery maycause serious internal injury. Do notallow anyone to swallow a lithiumbattery. Keep lithium batteries awayfrom children and pets. If swallowed,contact a physician immediately.

(1)

CAUTIONThe transmitter/remote controller is asensitive electronic instrument. Toavoid damaging it, do not expose it todust or moisture or tamper with inter-nal parts.

(1)

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-16

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

52D212

6) Press the “UNLOCK” button (2) on thetransmitter one time within 20 seconds(after step 5). All the doors will lock/unlock to confirm that the procedurehas been completed and the transmitterhas been programmed.

7) If you want to program an additionaltransmitter, repeat the procedure fromstep 1) through step 6).

8) Make sure that the keyless entry sys-tem operates properly by operatingeach transmitter.

To change the old transmitter codes inyour vehicle’s memoryIf you have lost one of the transmitters, youshould change the transmitter codes inyour vehicle’s memory as soon as possiblefor security.To remove one of the transmitter codesfrom your vehicle’s memory, first replace allthree of the transmitter codes in your vehi-cle’s memory, then program additionaltransmitters as follows:

1) Program one of your transmitters threetimes, by repeating the programmingprocedure shown in this section. Thiswill replace all the old transmitter codesin the vehicle’s memory with the codefor the transmitter you are using.

2) If you want to program up to two addi-tional transmitters, repeat the program-ming procedure shown in this section.

3) Make sure that the keyless entry sys-tem operates properly by operatingeach transmitter.

1. For USAThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2) This device must accept any interfer-



2. For CanadaThis device complies with Industry CanadaStandard RSS-210. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1) This device may not cause interference,

and2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of thedevice.

The term “IC:” before the certification/reg-istration number only signifies that theIndustry Canada technical specificationswere met.

(2)


2-17

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Theft Deterrent Light

80JM022

This light will blink with the ignition switchin the “OFF” or “ACC” position. The blink-ing light is intended to deter theft by lead-ing others to believe that the vehicle isequipped with a security system.

WindowsPower Window ControlsDriver’s side

80JC095

The power windows can only be operatedwhen the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-tion.

The driver’s door has switches (1), (2), (4),(5), to operate the driver’s window, thefront passenger’s window, the rear left win-dow and the rear right window, respec-tively.

Passenger’s door

80JC096

The passenger’s door has a switch (3) tooperate the passenger’s window.

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

EXAMPLE

(3)EXAMPLE


2-18

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

81A009

To open a window, push the top part of theswitch and to close a window lift up the toppart of the switch.

The driver’s window has an auto-down fea-ture for added convenience (at toll boothsor drive-through restaurants, for example).This means you can open the window with-out holding the window switch in the“Down” position. Press the driver’s windowswitch completely down and release it. Tostop the window before it reaches the bot-tom, pull the switch up briefly.

Lock switch

80JC097

The driver’s door also has a lock switch forthe passenger’s window(s). When youpush in the lock switch, the passenger’swindow(s) cannot be raised or lowered byoperating any of the switches (2), (3), (4) or(5). To restore normal operation, releasethe lock switch by pushing the switchagain.

CLOSE

OPEN

EXAMPLE WARNING• You should always lock the passen-

ger’s window operation when thereare children in the vehicle. Childrencan be seriously injured if they getpart of their body caught by thewindow during operation.

• To avoid injuring an occupant bywindow entrapment, be sure nopart of the occupant’s body suchas hands or head is in the path ofthe electric windows when closingthem.

• Always remove the ignition keywhen leaving the vehicle even ifonly for a short time. Also do notleave children alone in a parkedvehicle. Unattended children coulduse the electric window switchesand get trapped by the window.


2-19

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

52LM012

NOTE:The rear door windows are not designed toopen fully. They can be opened about 2/3of the way down.

NOTE:If you drive with one of the rear windowsopen, you may hear a loud sound causedby air vibration. To reduce the sound, openthe driver’s or front passenger’s window, ornarrow the rear window opening.

MirrorsInside Rearview Mirror

65D410

65D409

You can adjust the inside rearview mirrorby hand so as to see the rear of your vehi-cle in the mirror. To adjust the mirror, setthe selector tab (1) to the day position,then move the mirror up, down or sidewaysby hand to obtain the best view.

When driving at night, you can move theselector tab to the night position to reduceglare from the headlights of vehiclesbehind you.

EXAMPLE

(1)

Day driving Night driving

WARNING• Always adjust the mirror with the

selector set to the day position.• Only use the night position if it is

necessary to reduce glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you.Be aware that in this position youmay not be able to see someobjects that could be seen in theday position.


2-20

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Outside Rearview Mirrors

79J033

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so youcan just see the side of your vehicle in themirrors.

The passenger’s side mirror is a convex(curved surface) mirror. Objects seen inthis mirror will look smaller and appear far-ther away than when seen in a flat mirror.

Power Mirror Control (if equipped)

79J034

The switch to control the power rearviewmirrors is located on the driver’s doorpanel. You can adjust the mirrors when theignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-tion. To adjust the mirrors:

1) Move the selector switch to the left orright to select the mirror you wish toadjust.

2) Press the outer part of the switch thatcorresponds to the direction you wish tomove the mirror.

3) Return the selector switch to the centerposition to help prevent unintendedadjustment.

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with the heatedoutside rearview mirrors, refer to “HeatedRear Window and Heated Outside Rear-view Mirrors (if equipped) Switch” in thissection.

WARNINGBe careful when judging the size ordistance of a vehicle or other objectseen in the side convex mirror. Beaware that objects look smaller andappear farther away than when seenin a flat mirror.

(2)

(4)

(3)

(1) (1)

(3)(2)

(4)


2-21

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment

Adjusting Seat Position

80JM023

The adjustment lever for each front seat islocated under the front of the seat. Toadjust the seat position, pull up on theadjustment lever and slide the seat forwardor rearward. After adjustment, try to movethe seat forward and rearward to ensurethat it is securely latched.

80JM024

If the driver’s seat is equipped with a seatheight adjuster lever on the outboard sideof the seat, raise or lower the seat by pull-ing up or down the adjuster lever.

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust the driver’sseat or seatback while driving. Theseat or seatback could move unex-pectedly, causing loss of control.Make sure that the driver’s seat andseatback are properly adjustedbefore you start driving.

WARNINGTo avoid excessive seat belt slack,which reduces the effectiveness ofthe seat belts as a safety device,make sure that the seats are adjustedbefore the seat belts are fastened.


2-22

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Adjusting Seatbacks

80JM025

To adjust the seatback angle of front seats,pull up the lever on the outboard side ofthe seat, move the seatback to the desiredposition, and release the lever to lock theseatback in place. After adjustment, trymoving the seatback to make sure it issecurely locked.

Head Restraints

80J001

Head restraints are designed to helpreduce the risk of neck injuries in case ofan accident.Adjust the head restraint to the positionwhich places the center of the headrestraint closest to the top of your ears. Ifthis is not possible for very tall passengers,adjust the head restraint as high as possi-ble.

Front

80J2060

Each front seats is equipped with a headrestraint.

WARNINGAll seatbacks should always be in anupright position when driving, or seatbelt effectiveness may be reduced.Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-mum protection when seatbacks arein the upright position.

WARNINGAll occupants, including the driver,should not operate a vehicle or sit ina vehicle’s seat until the headrestraints are placed in their properpositions in order to minimize therisk of severe injury in the event of acrash.

WARNINGAll head restraints must be rein-stalled to properly protect vehicleoccupants.

WARNING• Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed.• Do not attempt to adjust the head

restraint while driving.


2-23

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

80J2012

(1) head restraint(2) bars(3) release knob

To raise the head restraint, pull upward onthe restraint until it clicks. To lower therestraint, push down on the restraint whileholding in the release knob (3). If a headrestraint must be removed (for cleaning,replacement, etc.), push in the releaseknob and pull the head restraint all the wayout.

NOTE:It may be necessary to recline the seat-back to provide enough overhead clear-ance to remove the head restraint.

80J2013

To reinstall the head restraint, insert thehead restraint bars into the holes (4) andpush the head restraint down.

Front Seat Heater (if equipped)

79J076

With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion, push in one or both of the seat heaterswitches to warm the correspondingseat(s). The indicator light below the switchwill also come on. To turn off the seatheater, push in the switch again. The indi-cator light below the switch will go off.

(3)

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

(4)


2-24

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

86G064

Rear SeatsHead RestraintsHead restraints are designed to helpreduce the risk of neck injuries in the caseof an accident.

WARNINGImproperly using the seat heater canbe hazardous. An occupant can suf-fer burns even if the heating tempera-ture is fairly low, if the occupant iswearing thin pants, a thin skirt orshorts and leaves the heater on forlong periods.Avoid using the seat heater for theseoccupants:• People who have reduced feeling in

their legs, including the elderly orthose with certain disabilities.

• Small children, or anyone with sen-sitive skin.

• People who are asleep or under theinfluence of alcohol or other drugswhich make them tired.

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the heater ele-ment:• Do not subject the front seats to

heavy impacts, such as childrenjumping on them.

• Do not cover the seat with anyinsulating materials such as blan-kets or cushions.

WARNINGAll occupants, including the driver,should not operate a vehicle or sit ina vehicle’s seat until the headrestraints are placed in their properpositions in order to minimize therisk of severe injury in the event of acrash.

WARNINGAll head restraints must be rein-stalled to properly protect vehicleoccupants.

WARNING• Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed.• Do not attempt to adjust the head

restraint while driving.


2-25

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

NOTE:It may be necessary to fold forward theseatback to provide enough overheadclearance to remove the head restraint.

Adjust the head restraint to the positionwhich places the center of the headrestraint closest to the top of your ears. Ifthis is not possible for very tall passengers,adjust the head restraint as high as possi-ble.

Rear

80J2061

Your vehicle is equipped with three headrestraints on the rear seat.

80J2005

(1) head restraint(2) bars(3) release knob

To raise the rear head restraint, pullupward on the restraint until it clicks. Tolower the restraint, push down on therestraint while holding in the release knob(3). If a head restraint must be removed(for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push inthe release knob and pull the headrestraint all the way out.

When installing a child restraint system,raise the head restraint to the most upperposition.

For SX4 SEDAN, if the distance betweenthe child restraint system and the anchorbracket is too close to properly tighten thechild restraint top strap, lower the headrestraint to the lowest position and connectthe top strap to the anchor bracket bypassing it over the top of the headrestraint.

EXAMPLE

(1)

(3)

(2)

EXAMPLE


2-26

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Folding Rear SeatsThe rear seats of your vehicle can be foldedforward to provide additional cargo space.

To fold the rear seats forward:

SX4

80JM026

SX4 SEDAN

80JC086

1) Hook the webbing of the outboard lap-shoulder belts in the belt hangers.

2) Lower the adjustable head restraintfully.

SX4

80JM027

SX4 SEDAN

80JC087

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

CAUTION• When you move a seatback, make

sure the belt webbing is hooked inthe seat belt hangers so the seatbelts are not caught by the seat-back, seat hinge, or seat latch. Thishelps prevent damage to the beltsystem.

• Make sure the belt webbing is nottwisted.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE


2-27

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

3) For SX4, pull the release lever on thetop of each split seat, and fold the seat-backs forward.For SX4 SEDAN, push the release but-ton on the top of each split seat, andfold the seatbacks forward.

To return the seat to the normal position,follow the procedure below.

SX4

80J1219

SX4 SEDAN

80J1022

Raise the seatback until it locks into place.

After returning the seat, try moving theseatback to make sure they are securelylatched.

CAUTIONAfter folding the rear seatback for-ward, do not allow any foreign mate-rial to enter the lock opening. Thismay cause damage to the inside ofthe lock and prevent the seatbackfrom being locked securely.

WARNINGLuggage or other cargo should bestowed in the luggage compartmentwith the rear seat in an upright posi-tion, whenever possible. If you needto carry cargo in the passenger com-partment with the rear seat backfolded forward, be sure to secure thecargo or it may be thrown about,causing injury. Never pile cargohigher than the seatbacks.

WARNINGWhen returning the rear seatback tothe normal position, be careful thatyour finger is not caught between thelock and the striker.

CAUTIONWhen returning the rear seatback tothe normal position, make sure thatthere is nothing around the striker.Any foreign materials prevent theseatback from being locked securely.

UNLOCK

Red

LOCK

EXAMPLE

UNLOCK

Red

LOCK

EXAMPLE


2-28

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems

65D231

65D606

WARNINGDo not put your hand into the rearseatback lock opening, or your fingermay get caught and be injured.

CAUTIONAfter securing the rear seatback,make sure that it is locked securely. Ifit is not, red will appear in the releaselever (SX4) or around the release but-ton (SX4 SEDAN).

CAUTION• When returning the rear seatback

to the normal position, do not allowany foreign material to enter thelock opening. This may prevent theseatback from being lockedsecurely.

• When returning the rear seatbackto the normal position, be sure tohandle it carefully by hand to avoidany damage to the lock itself. Donot push it by using some materialor by applying excessive force.

• As the lock is designed exclusivelyfor securing the rear seatback, donot use it for any other purpose.Incorrect use of it may cause dam-age to the inside of the lock andprevent the seatback from beinglocked securely.

WARNINGAn air bag supplements, or adds to,the frontal crash protection offeredby seat belts. The driver and all pas-sengers must be properly restrainedby wearing seat belts at all times,whether or not an air bag is mountedat their seating position, to minimizethe risk of severe injury or death inthe event of a crash.

WARNING• Never allow persons to ride in the

cargo area of a vehicle. In the eventof an accident, there is a muchgreater risk of injury for personswho are not riding in a seat withtheir seat belt securely fastened.

• Seat belts should always beadjusted as follows:– the lap portion of the belt should

be worn low across the pelvis,not across the waist.

– the shoulder straps should beworn on the outside shoulderonly, and never under the arm.

– the shoulder straps should beaway from your face and neck,but not falling off your shoulder.

(Continued)

Above the pelvis


2-29

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

65D201 65D199

WARNING(Continued)• Seat belts should never be worn

with the straps twisted and shouldbe adjusted as tightly as is com-fortable to provide the protectionfor which they have been designed.A slack belt will provide less pro-tection than one which is snug.

(Continued)

Across the pelvis

WARNING(Continued)• Pregnant women should use seat

belts, although specific recommen-dations about driving should bemade by the woman’s medical advi-sor. Remember that the lap portionof the belt should be worn as lowas possible across the hips, asshown in the diagram.

• Make sure that each seat beltbuckle is inserted into the properbuckle catch. It is possible to crossthe buckles in the rear seat.

(Continued)

as low as possible across the hips

WARNING(Continued)• Do not wear your seat belt over

hard or breakable objects in yourpockets or on your clothing. If anaccident occurs, objects such asglasses, pens, etc. under the seatbelt can cause injury.

• Never use the same seat belt onmore than one occupant and neverattach a seat belt over an infant orchild being held on an occupant’slap. Such seat belt use could causeserious injury in the event of anaccident.

• Periodically inspect seat beltassemblies for excessive wear anddamage. Seat belts should bereplaced if webbing becomesfrayed, contaminated, or damagedin any way. It is essential to replacethe entire seat belt assembly after ithas been worn in a severe impact,even if damage to the assembly isnot obvious.

• Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in the rearseat, if equipped.

(Continued)


2-30

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Lap-Shoulder BeltEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR)The seat belt has an emergency lockingretractor (ELR), which is designed to lockthe seat belt only during a sudden stop orimpact. It also may lock if you pull the beltacross your body very quickly. If this hap-pens, let the belt go back to unlock it, thenpull the belt across your body more slowly.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)The front passenger’s seat belt and therear seat belts have emergency lockingretractors (ELRs) that can be temporarilyconverted to function as automatic lockingretractors (ALRs). The ALR mode shouldbe used if you need to secure a childrestraint system in the seat. Refer to the“Child Restraint Systems” section fordetails.

Safety reminder

60A038

60A040

WARNING(Continued)• Infants and small children should

never be transported unless theyare properly restrained. Restraintsystems for infants and small chil-dren can be purchased commer-cially and should be used. Makesure that the system you purchasemeets Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. Read and follow all thedirections provided by the manu-facturer.

• Avoid contamination of seat beltwebbing by polishes, oils, chemi-cals and particularly battery acid.Cleaning may safely be carried outusing mild soap and water.

• For children, if the shoulder beltirritates the neck or face, move thechild closer to the center of thevehicle.

• All seatbacks should always be inan upright position when driving,or seat belt effectiveness may bereduced. Seat belts are designed tooffer maximum protection whenseatbacks are in the upright posi-tion.

Sit up straight and fully back

Low on hips

Low on hips


2-31

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

To reduce the risk of sliding under the beltduring a collision, position the lap portionof the belt across your lap as low on yourhips as possible and adjust it to a snug fitby pulling the shoulder portion of the beltupward through the latch plate. The lengthof the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itselfto allow freedom of movement.

All Seat Belts

60A036

To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight andwell back in the seat, pull the latch plateattached to the seat belt across your bodyand press it into the buckle until you hear a“click”.

80J2008

NOTE:The word “CENTER” is molded into thebuckle for the rear center belt. The bucklesare designed so a latch plate cannot beinserted into the wrong buckle.

EXAMPLE


2-32

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

60A039

To unfasten the belt, push the red“PRESS” button on the buckle and allowthe belt to retract.

Seat Belt ReminderDriver’s seat belt reminder light

80J2017

Front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight

80J2018

When the driver and front passenger don’tbuckle their seat belts, the driver’s seat beltreminder light in the instrument cluster andthe front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight in the information display will come onand a buzzer will sound as a reminder tothe driver and front passenger to buckletheir seat belts.

The seat belt reminder functions as shownin the figure below. There are some differ-ences between the driver’s seat beltreminder and the front passenger’s seatbelt reminder. For more details, refer to theexplanation below.

WARNINGIt is absolutely essential that thedriver and passengers wear their seatbelts at all times. Persons who arenot wearing seat belts have a muchgreater risk of injury if an accidentoccurs. Make a regular habit of buck-ling your seat belt before putting thekey in the ignition.


2-33

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Flow chart

52D219

Reminder 1 – 3For each reminder 1 – 3, the reminder light comes on for about 20 seconds, then blinks forabout 55 seconds. When the reminder light first comes on, a buzzer sounds intermittentlyfor about 6 seconds.

Ignition Switch “ON”

Seat belt isbuckled

30 sec.

Vehicle speed:increase to 8 km/h

Seat belt isunbuckled

Vehicle speed:below 8 km/h

Vehicle speed:over 8 km/h

Reminder 3

3 min.

No reminderSeat belt isunbuckled

Vehicle speed:below 8 km/h

Vehicle speed:over 8 km/h

No reminder

Reminder 2

Reminder 1

Driver’s seat belt reminderIf the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckledwith the ignition key in the “ON” position,the driver’s seat belt reminder works as fol-lows:1) The driver’s seat belt reminder light will

come on for about 20 seconds whenthe ignition key is turned to the “ON”position then will blink for about 55 sec-onds. When the light comes on, abuzzer will also sound intermittently forabout 6 seconds (Reminder 1).

2) If the vehicle is driven (vehicle speed >8 km/h), Reminder 2 will operate about30 seconds after Reminder 1 has fin-ished. If the vehicle is not driven (vehiclespeed < 8 km/h), Reminder 2 will oper-ate when driving starts (vehicle speed >8 km/h).

3) Reminder 3 will operate about 3 min-utes after Reminder 2 has finished.

4) Even if the driver’s seat belt remainsunbuckled after Reminder 3, there willbe no further reminders.

If the driver has buckled his or her seat beltand later unbuckles the seat belt, thereminder system will be activated fromReminder 1 or Reminder 2 according tothe vehicle speed. (Refer to the flow chart.)

The driver’s seat belt reminder will be auto-matically canceled when the driver’s seatbelt is buckled or the ignition switch isturned off.


2-34

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Front passenger’s seat belt reminderThe front passenger’s seat belt reminderwill activate only when there is a passen-ger sitting in the front seat. In some situa-tions, however, such as when you placeheavy objects in the front seat, the seatbelt reminder can be activated as if therewere a passenger present. The front pas-senger’s seat belt reminder works in thesame manner as the driver’s seat beltreminder, except that it is not activateduntil 10 seconds after the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position.

Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster

64J198

Adjust the shoulder anchor height so thatthe shoulder belt rides on the center of theoutside shoulder. To upward, slide theanchor up. To downward, slide the anchordown while pulling the lock knob out. Afteradjustment, make sure that the anchor issecurely locked.

Seat Belt Hanger (if equipped)SX4

80JM140

SX4 SEDAN

80JM141

WARNINGBe sure that the shoulder belt is posi-tioned on the center of the outsideshoulder. The belt should be awayfrom your face and neck, but not fall-ing off your shoulder. Misadjustmentof the belt could reduce the effective-ness of the safety belt in a crash.

EXAMPLEEXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags): 3, 9, 12

2-35

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Seat Belt Inspection

65D209S

Periodically inspect the seat belts to makesure they work properly and are not dam-aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latchplates, retractors, anchorages and guideloops. Replace any seat belts which do notwork properly or are damaged.

CAUTIONWhen you move a seatback, makesure the belt webbing is hooked inthe seat belt hangers so the seatbelts are not caught by the seatback,seat hinge, or seat latch. This helpsprevent damage to the belt system.

EXAMPLEWARNING

Be sure to inspect all seat beltassemblies after any collision. Anyseat belt assembly which was in useduring a collision (other than a veryminor one) should be replaced, evenif damage to the assembly is notobvious. Any seat belt assemblywhich was not in use during a colli-sion should be replaced if it does notfunction properly, it is damaged inany way or the seat belt pretension-ers were activated.

Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags): 3, 9, 12

2-36

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Child Restraint Systems

60G332

Infant restraint - rear seat only

65D202

Infant restraint - rear seat only

80JC007

Booster seat

80JC008

SUZUKI highly recommends that you usea child restraint system to restrain infantsand small children. Many different types ofchild restraint systems are available; makesure that the restraint system you selectmeets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards.

All child restraint systems are designed tobe secured in vehicle seats by either seatbelts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-shoulder belts) or by special rigid loweranchor bars built into the seats. Wheneverpossible, SUZUKI recommends that childrestraint systems be installed on the rearseat. According to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properly restrained inrear seating positions than in front seatingpositions.

If you must use a front-facing child restraintin the front passenger’s seat, be sure tomove the front passenger’s seat as farback as possible.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE


2-37

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

65D607 65D608

65D609

WARNINGDo not install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’sseat. If the passenger’s air baginflates, a child in a rear-facing childrestraint could be killed or seriouslyinjured. The back of a rear-facingchild restraint would be too close tothe inflating air bag.

WARNINGChildren could be endangered in acrash if their child restraints are notproperly secured in the vehicle.When installing a child restraint sys-tem, be sure to follow the instruc-tions below. Be sure to secure thechild in the restraint system accord-ing to the manufacturer’s instruc-tions.


2-38

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts (child restraint with no top strap)A-ELR type belt

83E031

Install your child restraint system accord-ing to the instructions provided by the childrestraint system manufacturer. If you installthe child restraint system in the front seat,be sure to slide the seat to the rearmostposition. After making sure that the seatbelt is securely latched:

A-ELR type belt

83E035

1) Pull all of the remaining webbing out ofthe retractor. You will hear a click, whichmeans that the emergency lockingretractor (ELR) has converted to func-tion as an automatic locking retractor(ALR).

A-ELR type belt

83E032

2) Allow the extra webbing to retract, andpull the webbing toward the retractor totake up any slack. Make sure that thelap portion of the belt is tight around thechild restraint system and the shoulderportion of the belt is positioned so that itcannot interfere with the child’s head orneck.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE


2-39

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

A-ELR type belt

83E036

3) Make sure that the retractor has con-verted to the ALR mode by trying to pullwebbing out of the retractor. If theretractor is in the ALR mode, the beltwill be locked.

A-ELR type belt

65D234

A-ELR type belt

65D235

4) Try moving the child restraint system inall directions, to make sure it is securelyinstalled. If you need to tighten the belt,pull more webbing toward the retractor.

WARNINGIf the retractor is not in the ALRmode, the child restraint system canmove or tip over when your vehicleturns or stops abruptly.

EXAMPLE WARNINGBefore installing a child restraint inthe rear center seat, follow thesesteps for secure installation:• Make sure the detachable connec-

tor is securely latched and the web-bing is not twisted.

• Make sure the seat belt is passedthrough the seat belt guide.

EXAMPLE

Move to check

EXAMPLE

Pull to tighten


2-40

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

To revert from ALR to ELR

65D267

When you unbuckle the seat belt and allowit to retract to a certain length, the retractorwill automatically revert back to the normalELR mode.

Installation with the LATCH System

65D337

80JM080

Your vehicle is equipped with loweranchors for securing up to one or two stan-dard LATCH-type child restraint(s) in therear seats. (LATCH stands for LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children.) The anchors are located where the rear ofthe seat cushion meets the bottom of theseatback.

EXAMPLE

Rigid lower connecting bar type

Flexible lower connecting strap type

EXAMPLE


2-41

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

SX4 SEDAN

80JC028

For SX4 SEDAN, the covers marked withthe child restraint symbol as shown in theillustration indicate the presence of loweranchors. Remove the covers before install-ing the child restraint system. Cover thelower anchors when not in use.

Install the LATCH-type child restraint sys-tem according to the instructions providedby the child restraint system manufacturer.After installing, try moving the childrestraint system in all directions, especiallyforward to make sure the flexible straps orrigid connecting bars are securely latchedto the anchors.

NOTE:Although there are three rear seating posi-tions, you cannot install three LATCH typechild restraints in the rear seats. You caninstall one or two LATCH restraint(s). Besure to install the LATCH type childrestraint(s) in the outboard seating posi-tions.

If your LATCH restraint has flexible lowerconnecting straps, these general instruc-tions apply:1) If possible, fold the seatback rearward

for easier installation.

73K017

2) Place the child restraint in the rear seat,feeding the strap hooks through theslots in the seat cushion or the slots inthe seatback bottom.

65D340

3) Snap the strap hooks to the anchors.Take care not to pinch your fingers.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE


2-42

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

65D341

4) Return the seatback to the normal,upright position. Tighten the lowerstraps as described in the child restraintowner’s manual. Attach the top tetherstrap, if applicable.

65D342

5) Make sure the child restraint is securelyfastened by trying to move the childrestraint system in all directions, espe-cially forward.

If your LATCH restraint has rigid lower con-necting bars, these general instructionsapply:1) If possible, fold the seatback rearward

for easier installation.

78F114

2) Place the child restraint in the rear seat,inserting the connecting bars throughthe slots in the seat cushion or the slotsin the seatback bottom.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGThe seatback should always besecurely latched in a fairly uprightposition when any type of child seatis installed. An unlatched or reclinedseatback will reduce the intendedeffectiveness of the child restraintsystem.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

2-43

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

54G183

3) Use your hands to carefully align theconnecting bar tips with the anchors.Take care not to pinch your fingers.

54G184

4) Push the child restraint toward theanchors so that the connecting bar tipsare partially hooked to the anchors.Use your hands to confirm the position.

54G185

5) Grasp the front of the child restraint andpush the child restraint forcefully tolatch the connecting bars. Make surethey are securely latched by trying tomove the child restraint system in alldirections, especially forward.

6) Return the seatback if folded. Attachthe top tether strap, if applicable.

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

WARNINGThe seatback should always besecurely latched in a fairly uprightposition when any type of child seatis installed. An unlatched or reclinedseatback will reduce the intendedeffectiveness of the child restraintsystem.

EXAMPLE

2-44

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Installation of Child Restraint with Top StrapSX4

80JS072

SX4 SEDAN

80JC102

Some child restraint systems require theuse of a top strap. Top strap anchor brack-ets are provided in your vehicle at the loca-tions shown in the illustrations. Install thechild restraint system as follows:1) For SX4, remove the luggage compart-

ment cover.2) Secure the child restraint on the rear

seat using the procedure describedabove for securing a restraint systemthat does not require a top strap.

3) For SX4 SEDAN, open the cover that ismarked with the anchor bracket symbolto access the anchor bracket. Close thecover when not using the anchorbracket.

4) Hook the top strap to the anchorbracket and tighten the top strapaccording to the instructions providedby the child restraint system manufac-turer. Be sure to attach the top strap tothe corresponding anchor locateddirectly behind the child restraint. Donot attach the top strap to the luggagerestraint loops (if equipped).

80JC029

EXAMPLEFront

EXAMPLE Front

WARNINGDo not attach the child restraint topstrap to the luggage restraint loops(if equipped). Incorrectly attached topstrap will reduce the intended effec-tiveness of the child restraint system.

Type 2

Type 1

Type 3

2-45

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

5) When routing the top strap, be sure topass the top strap as shown in the illus-tration. For SX4 SEDAN, if the top strapcannot be properly tightened whenpassed under the head restraint asshown in the Type 1 and Type 2 illustra-tions, pass the top strap over the top ofthe head restraint as shown in the Type3 illustration. (Refer to “HeadRestraints” section for details on how toraise or lower the head restraint.)

6) Make sure that cargo does not interferewith routing of the top strap.

Seat Belt Extender

65D613

(1) Center of body(2) Less than 152 mm (6 inches)(3) Open end of extender buckle

If a seat belt cannot be fastened securelybecause it is not long enough, see yourauthorized SUZUKI dealer for a seat beltextender. Seat belt extenders are availablefor each seating position except for therear center position. After inspecting therelationship between the seat belt length,the occupant’s body size, and the seatadjustment (the driver’s seat should alwaysbe adjusted as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle, andother adjustable seats should be adjustedas far back as possible), your dealer canselect the appropriate seat belt extender.

• A seat belt extender should only be usedfor the person, vehicle and seating loca-tion it was provided for.

• When using the extender, ensure thatboth ends are latched securely. Do notuse the extender if the open end of theextender’s buckle is within 152 mm (6inches) of the center of the occupant’sbody (See diagram). Use of the extenderwhen the buckle is too close to the cen-ter of the body could increase the risk ofabdominal injury in the event of an acci-dent, and could cause the shoulder beltto be positioned incorrectly.

• Make sure to use the correct buckle cor-responding to your seating position.

• Seat belt extenders are not intended foruse by pregnant women, and shouldonly be used upon approval by theirmedical advisors.

• Remove and stow the extender when itis not being used.

2-46

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Seat Belt Pretensioner System (for front seat belt only)

52D011

Your vehicle is equipped with a seat beltpretensioner system at the front seatingpositions. You can use the pretensionerseat belts in the same manner as ordinaryseat belts.

The seat belt pretensioner system workswith the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM (advanced air bags). The crashsensors and the electronic controller of theair bag system also control the seat beltpretensioners. The pretensioners are trig-gered only when there is a frontal or sidecrash severe enough to trigger the air bagsand the seat belts are fastened. If the seatbelts are not fastened, the respective pre-tensioner system will not be activated. Forprecautions and general informationincluding servicing the pretensioner sys-tem, refer to the “Supplemental RestraintSystem (air bags)” section in addition tothis “Seat Belt Pretensioner System” sec-tion, and follow all those precautions.

The pretensioner is located in each frontseat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu-pant’s body more snugly in the event of afrontal or side crash. The retractors willremain locked after the pretensioners areactivated. Upon activation, some noise willoccur and some smoke may be released.These conditions are not harmful and donot indicate a fire in the vehicle.

WARNINGFailure to follow these instructionsmay increase the risk of injury in acrash.• Only use an extender for the per-

son, vehicle and seating position itwas provided for.

• Do not use if open end ofextender’s buckle is within 152 mm(6 inches) of center of occupant’sbody (See diagram).

• Remove and stow the extenderwhen it is not being used.

WARNINGThis section of the owner’s manualdescribes your SUZUKI’s SEAT BELTPRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Pleaseread and follow ALL these instruc-tions carefully to minimize your riskof severe injury or death.

EXAMPLE

2-47

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

The driver and all passengers must beproperly restrained by wearing seat beltsat all times, whether or not a pretensioneris equipped at their seating position, tohelp minimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash.

Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; donot lean forward or sideways. Adjust thebelt so the lap portion of the belt is wornlow across the pelvis, not across the waist.Please refer to the “Seat Adjustment” sec-tion and the instructions and precautionsabout the seat belts in this “Seat Belts andChild Restraint Systems” section for detailson proper seat and seat belt adjustments.Please note that the pretensioners alongwith the air bags will activate only in severefrontal or side collisions. They are notdesigned to activate in rear impacts, roll-overs or minor frontal collisions. The pre-tensioners can be activated only once. Ifthe pretensioners are activated (that is, ifthe air bags are activated), have the pre-tensioner system serviced by an autho-rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.

If the AIR BAG light on the instrument clus-ter does not blink or come on briefly whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position, stays on for more than 10 sec-onds, or comes on while driving, the pre-tensioner system or the air bag systemmay not work properly. Have both systemsinspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealeras soon as possible.

Service on or around the pretensioner sys-tem components or wiring must be per-formed only by an authorized SUZUKIdealer who is specially trained. Improperservice could result in unintended activa-tion of pretensioners or could render thepretensioner inoperative. Either of thesetwo conditions may result in personalinjury.

To prevent damage or unintended activa-tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-tery is disconnected and the ignition switchhas been in the “LOCK” position for at least90 seconds before performing any electri-cal service work on your SUZUKI. Do nottouch pretensioner system components orwiring. The wires are wrapped with yellowtape or yellow tubing, and the couplers areyellow. When scrapping your SUZUKI, askyour SUZUKI dealer, body repair shop orscrap yard for assistance.

Supplemental Restraint System (air bags)

54G022

Your vehicle has advanced front air bagsand side air bags for the driver and rightfront passenger. Your vehicle also has sidecurtain air bags.

WARNINGThis section of the owner’s manualdescribes the protection provided byyour SUZUKI’s SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags).Please read and follow ALL theseinstructions carefully to minimizeyour risk of severe injury or death inthe event of a collision.

EXAMPLE

2-48

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

80J2085

1

7

210

9

96

3

11

12

4

1411

5

3

8

8

EXAMPLE

80J2086

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple-mental Restraint System consisting of thefollowing components in addition to a lap-shoulder belt at each front seating position.

1. Driver’s front air bag2. Front passenger’s front air bag 3. Seat belt pretensioners4. Air bag controller5. Driver’s seat position sensors6. Occupant classification module7. “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator8. Forward crash sensors9. Side air bags10.Side curtain air bags11.Side crash sensors12.Rear side crash sensors13.Front passenger’s sensor mat14.Seat belt buckle sensors

13

2-49

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

63J030

If the AIR BAG light on the instrument clus-ter does not blink or come on when theignition switch is first turned to the “ON”position, or the AIR BAG light stays on, orcomes on while driving, the air bag system(or the seat belt pretensioner system) maynot work properly. Have the air bag systeminspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealeras soon as possible.

Front Air Bags

80JS026

80J2009

The driver’s front air bag is located behindthe center pad of the steering wheel andthe front passenger’s front air bag islocated behind the passenger’s side of thedashboard. The words “SRS AIRBAG” aremolded into the air bag covers to identifythe location of the air bags.

Frontal collision range

60G032

Front air bags are designed to inflate onlyin severe frontal collisions.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

2-50

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Front air bags will not inflate

65D236

Front air bags will probably not inflate

65D237

Front air bags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts, side impacts, rollovers orminor frontal collisions, since they wouldoffer no protection in those types of acci-dents. Remember, since air bags deployonly one time during an accident, seatbelts are needed to restrain occupantsfrom further movements during the acci-dent.

Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitutefor seat belts. To maximize your protection,ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Beaware that no system can prevent all pos-sible injuries that may occur in an accident.

Your vehicle has “dual stage” front airbags, which adjust the air bag inflationforce according to crash severity, driver’sseat fore/aft position and whether or notthe front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.Also, your vehicle has a front passengersensing system, which turns off the frontpassenger’s front air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner under certain conditions.

Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air Bags

68KM090WARNING

An air bag supplements, or adds to,the crash protection offered by seatbelts. The driver and all passengersmust be properly restrained by wear-ing seat belts at all times, whether ornot air bags are mounted at theirseating position, to minimize the riskof severe injury or death in the eventof a crash.

EXAMPLE

2-51

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

80J2078

Side air bags are located in the part of thefront seatbacks closest to the doors. Thewords “SRS AIRBAG” are indicated on thetag to identify the location of the side airbags.

80JM146

Side curtain air bags are located in the rooflining. The words “SRS AIRBAG” aremolded into the pillar to identify the loca-tion of the side curtain air bags.

Side collision range

80JM032

Side air bags and side curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate only in severe sideimpact collisions.

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

2-52

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Side air bags and side curtain air bagswill not inflate

54G027

Side air bags and side curtain air bagswill probably not inflate

54G028

Side air bags and side curtain air bags arenot designed to inflate in frontal or rear col-lisions, rollovers or minor side collisions,since they would offer no protection inthose types of accidents. Only the side airbag and side curtain air bag on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck will inflate.Remember, since an air bag deploys onlyone time during an accident, seat belts areneeded to restrain occupants from furthermovements during the accident.

Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitutefor seat belts. To maximize your protection,ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Beaware that no system can prevent all pos-sible injuries that may occur in an accident.

WARNINGAn air bag supplements, or adds to,the crash protection offered by seatbelts. The driver and all passengersmust be properly restrained by wear-ing seat belts at all times, whether ornot air bags are mounted at theirseating position, to minimize the riskof severe injury or death in the eventof a crash.

WARNINGIf the AIR BAG light in the instrumentcluster ever comes on and stays on,it means that something may bewrong with the air bag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle ser-viced immediately, because the airbags may not offer the protection forwhich they were designed.

2-53

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Driver’s Seat Position SensorThe driver’s seat is equipped with a seatposition sensor to monitor the driver seatfore/aft position. The seat position sensorprovides information which is used tojudge if the driver’s front air bag shoulddeploy at reduced power or at full power.

When the seat position sensor has a prob-lem, the AIR BAG light on the instrumentcluster will turn on. If this happens, deploy-ment of the driver’s front air bag will notinclude consideration of seat fore/aft posi-tion. Have the air bag system inspected byan authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon aspossible.

Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Buckle SensorThe front passenger’s seat belt buckle isequipped with a sensor to monitor whetheror not the front passenger’s seat belt is fas-tened. The front passenger’s seat beltbuckle sensor provides information whichis used to judge if the front passenger’s airbag should deploy at reduced power or atfull power.

Front Passenger Sensing SystemThe front passenger sensing system willturn off the front passenger’s front air bagand seat belt pretensioner under certainconditions. This system works using a sen-sor mat that is part of the front passenger’sseat. The front passenger sensing systemis designed to detect whether an occupantis present in the seat and, if an occupant ispresent, to determine whether the frontpassenger’s front air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner should be enabled or disabled(turned off).

NOTE:The front passenger’s side air bag and theside curtain air bag are not controlled bythe front passenger sensing system.

80J2019

CAUTIONDo not put any cargo or metal objectsunder the seat. The seat position sen-sor may not work properly or may bedamaged if it is covered with some-thing.

WARNINGWhen the buckle sensor has a prob-lem, the AIR BAG light on the instru-ment cluster will turn on. If thishappens, deployment of the frontpassenger’s air bag will not includeconsideration of whether the frontpassenger’s seat belt is fastened ornot. Have the air bag systeminspected by an authorized SUZUKIdealer as soon as possible.

2-54

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF”indicator comes on for several seconds tolet you know the system is working. Whenthe front passenger sensing system hasturned off the front passenger’s front airbag including the seat belt pretensioner,the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator willcome on and stay on to remind you thatthe front passenger’s front air bag is off.

The front passenger sensing system usesfront seat pressure measurements andpressure locations to determine whether toactivate or deactivate the front passenger’sfront air bag. The front passenger sensingsystem may or may not turn off the front airbag, depending on the front passenger’sseating posture and body build. The airbag should be turned off in the followingsituations:• There is no occupant in the front pas-

senger seat.• The occupant of the front passenger

seat lifts his or her weight off of the seatfor a period of time.

• The occupant of the front passengerseat is an infant or small child in a childrestraint system or a small child in abooster seat.

• A smaller person, such as a child whohas outgrown child restraints or a verysmall adolescent is seated in the frontpassenger seat.

NOTE:If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator will notcome on but the front passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and the seat belt pre-tensioner will not operate.

If you have secured a child in the front pas-senger seat in a forward-facing childrestraint system or booster seat and the“PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is noton, turn the vehicle off, remove the childrestraint or booster seat from the vehicleand reinstall it following the child restraintor booster seat manufacturer’s directions.Also refer to “Seat Belts and ChildRestraint Systems” in this section. If, afterreinstalling the child restraint and restart-ing the vehicle, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF”indicator is still not lit, check to make surethat the vehicle’s seatback is not pressingthe child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion ifpossible. Also make sure the child restraintis not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indi-cator is still not on, secure the child in thechild restraint or booster seat in a rear seatposition in the vehicle and check with yourdealer.

65D607

According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in rearseating positions than in front seating posi-tions. Whenever possible, SUZUKI recom-mends you install child restraints in therear seat.

WARNINGDo not install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’sseat. If the passenger’s front air baginflates, a child in a rear-facing childrestraint could be seriously injured.The back of a rear-facing childrestraint would be too close to theinflating air bag.

2-55

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to enable the front passenger’sfront air bag when the system senses aproperly-seated adult in the front passen-ger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the air bag to beenabled, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indica-tor will remain off to remind you that the airbag is active.

If a person of adult size is sitting in thefront passenger’s seat and the “PASS AIRBAG OFF” indicator comes on, it could bebecause that person isn’t sitting properly inthe seat. If this happens, unfasten the seatbelts, sit upright in the center of the seatwith the seatback nearly vertical and yourlegs outstretched, and refasten the seatbelt.

52D258

When seated as shown in the above illus-tration, the front passenger sensing sys-tem senses a properly-seated occupantand enables the air bag.

When using a seat belt extender, follow theinstructions in the “Seat Belt Extender”section.

WARNINGDo not place any heavy objects onthe front passenger’s seat. The pres-sure sensors in the sensor mat couldbe damaged and the front passengersensing system may not work prop-erly.

WARNINGThe front passenger sensing systemmay not work properly in the follow-ing situations:• The occupant is sitting near the

dashboard or is not sitting in theproper position.

• Objects placed under the seat arepushing up on the seat cushion.

WARNINGIf the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicatoron the instrument panel turns oneven though there is no occupant oran adult occupant in the front pas-senger’s seat, it means that some-thing may be wrong with thepassenger sensing system. Have thesystem inspected by an authorizedSUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.

2-56

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

How the System WorksIn a frontal collision, the crash sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and send a signalto the controller. If the controller judgesthat the deceleration represents a severefrontal crash, the controller will trigger theinflators. The controller also judges:• Whether the front air bags should deploy

at reduced power or at full power accord-ing to crash severity.

• Whether the air bags should deploy atreduced power or at full power accordingto crash severity, driver’s seat fore/aftposition and whether or not the frontpassenger’s seat belt is fastened.

• Whether the front passenger’s front airbag should deploy or not based on clas-sification of the occupant of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Since your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, and side curtain air bags, crash sen-sors will detect a side collision, and if thecontroller judges that the side collision issevere enough, it will trigger the side airbag and side curtain air bag inflators.

The inflators inflate the appropriate airbags with nitrogen or argon gas. Theinflated air bags provide a cushion for yourhead (front air bags and side curtain airbags only) and upper body. The air baginflates and deflates so quickly that youmay not even realize that it has activated.The air bag will neither hinder your viewnor make it harder to exit the vehicle.

Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefullyin order to reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries. However, an unavoidableconsequence of the quick inflation is thatthe air bag may irritate bare skin, such asthe facial area against a front air bag. Also,upon inflation, a loud noise will occur andsome powder and smoke will be released.These conditions are not harmful and donot indicate a fire in the car. Be aware,however, that some air bag componentsmay be hot for a while after inflation.

A seat belt helps keep you in the properposition for maximum protection when anair bag inflates. Adjust your seat as farback as possible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle. Sit fully back in yourseat; sit up straight; do not lean over thesteering wheel or dashboard. Front occu-pants should not lean on or sleep againstthe door. Please refer to the “Seat Adjust-ment” section and the “Seat Belts andChild Restraint Systems” section in the“BEFORE DRIVING” section for details onproper seat and seat belt adjustments.

WARNING• Do not spill any liquids on the seat.

Liquids can damage the sensorsunder the front seat.

• Have the driver’s seat position sen-sor and the front passenger’s sen-sor mat inspected by your dealerafter a collision.

• Do not replace the front seats. Ifyou replace them, the air bags andfront passenger sensing systemmay not work properly.

• Do not use a seat cover. If you usea seat cover, the front passengersensing system may not work prop-erly.

2-57

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

65D610

54G582

Note that even though your vehicle may bemoderately damaged in a collision, the col-lision may not have been severe enough totrigger the front, side, or side curtain airbags to inflate. If your car sustains ANYfront-end or side damage, have the air bagsystem inspected by an authorizedSUZUKI dealer to ensure it is in properworking order.

Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosticmodule which records information aboutthe air bag system if the air bags deploy ina crash. The module records informationabout overall system status, which sensorsactivated the deployment, and whether thefront seat belts were in use.

WARNING• The driver should not lean over the

steering wheel. The front passen-ger should not rest his or her bodyagainst the dashboard, or other-wise get too close to the dash-board. For vehicles with side airbags and side curtain air bags,occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door. In these sit-uations, the out-of-position occu-pant would be too close to aninflating air bag, and may suffersevere injury.

• Do not attach any objects to, orplace any objects over, the steeringwheel or dashboard. Do not placeany objects between the air bagand the driver or front passenger.These objects may interfere with airbag operation or may be propelledby the air bag in the event of acrash. Either of these conditionsmay cause severe injury.

• For vehicles with side air bags, donot place seat covers on the frontseats, because seat covers couldrestrict the air bag’s inflation. Also,do not place any cup holders orother objects on the door, as theseobjects could be propelled by theair bag in the event of a crash.Either of these conditions maycause severe injury.

2-58

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Servicing the Air Bag SystemIf the air bags inflate, have the air bags andrelated components replaced by an autho-rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.

If your vehicle ever gets in deep water andthe driver’s floor is submerged, the air bagcontroller could be damaged. If this hap-pens, have the air bag system inspectedby the SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.

Special procedures are required for servic-ing or replacing an air bag. For that reason,only an authorized SUZUKI dealer shouldbe allowed to service or replace your airbags. Please remind anyone who servicesyour SUZUKI that it has air bags.

Service on or around air bag componentsor wiring must be performed only by anauthorized SUZUKI dealer. Improper ser-vice could result in unintended air bagdeployment or could render the air bagsinoperative. Either of these two conditionsmay result in severe injury.

To prevent damage or unintended inflationof the air bag system, be sure the batteryis disconnected and the ignition switch hasbeen in the “LOCK” position for at least 90seconds before performing any electricalservice work on your SUZUKI. Do nottouch air bag system components or wires.The wires are wrapped with yellow tape oryellow tubing, and the couplers are yellowfor easy identification.

Scrapping a car that has an undeployed airbag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer,body repair shop or scrap yard for helpwith disposal.

If it is necessary to modify the advancedfront air bag system to accommodate aperson with disabilities, owners in the con-tinental United States can call AmericanSuzuki toll-free at 1-800-934-0934, or writeto:

American Suzuki Motor Corporation Automotive Customer Relations 3251 East Imperial Highway Brea, CA 92821-6795

If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canadaplease contact the Suzuki Canada Cus-tomer Relations Department by telephoneat 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or inwriting at:


2-59

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Instrument Cluster1. Speedometer2. Tachometer3. Fuel gauge4. Temperature gauge5. Information display6. Trip meter selector knob7. Indicator selector knob8. Warning and indicator lights

80J2020

5 7 88 6

12 384

EXAMPLE

2-60

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Warning and Indicator LightsLow Tire Pressure Warning Light

52D305

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that uses a lowtire pressure warning light to inform youwhen one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly under-inflated.

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, this light comes on briefly soyou can check that the light is working.

When the low tire pressure warning light islit, one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. You should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure as indicatedon the vehicle’s tire information placard.Driving on a significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability. Each tire, including the spare,should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and set to the recommended

inflation pressure as specified in the vehi-cle placard and owner’s manual.

The low tire pressure warning light is alsoused to inform you of a TPMS malfunction.When the system detects a malfunction,this light will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuously illu-minated. This sequence will be repeatedapproximately ten minutes after subse-quent the ignition switch is turned on aslong as the malfunction exists.

NOTE:The low tire pressure warning light may notcome on immediately if you have a suddenloss of air pressure.

WARNINGIf the low tire pressure warning lightdoes not come on when the ignitionis turned to the “ON” position, orcomes on and blinks while drivingthere may be a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system. Haveyour vehicle inspected by an autho-rized SUZUKI dealer. Even if the lightturns off after blinking, indicatingthat monitoring system has recov-ered, make sure to have an autho-rized SUZUKI dealer check thesystem.

WARNINGThe load rating of your tires isreduced at lower inflation pressures.If your tires become even moderatelyunder-inflated, the vehicle load mayexceed the load rating of the tires,which can lead to tire failure. The lowtire pressure warning light will notalert you of this condition. The warn-ing light will only come on when oneor more of your tires become signifi-cantly under-inflated. Check andadjust your tire inflation pressure atleast once a month. Refer to “Tires”in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-NANCE” section.

2-61

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System”in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-tion for additional details on the tire pres-sure monitoring system. Refer to “Tires” inthe “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”section for information on maintainingproper tire pressure.

Brake System Warning Light

65D477

This light comes on briefly when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.The light also comes on under the follow-ing conditions: 1) when the parking brakeis engaged and 2) when the fluid in thebrake fluid reservoir falls below the speci-fied level. The light should go out after fullyreleasing the parking brake, if the fluidlevel in the brake fluid reservoir is ade-quate.If this light and the ABS warning light stayon, or come on simultaneously when driv-ing, then there may be something wrongwith both the rear brake proportioningvalve function and anti-lock function of theABS.

If the brake system warning light comes onwhile you are driving the vehicle, it maymean that there is something wrong withthe vehicle’s brake system. If this happens,you should:

WARNINGIf the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on and stays on, reduce yourspeed and avoid abrupt steering andbraking. Stop in a safe place as soonas possible and check your tires.• If you have a flat tire, replace it with

the spare tire. Refer to “JackingInstructions” in the “EMERGENCYSERVICE” section. Refer to“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels”for instructions on how to restorenormal operation of the tire pres-sure monitoring system after youhave had a flat tire.

• If one or more of your tires isunder-inflated, adjust the inflationpressure in all of your tires to therecommended inflation pressure assoon as possible.

Be aware that driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire can causethe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure, and may affect steeringcontrol and brake effectiveness. Thiscould lead to an accident, resulting insevere injury or death.

2-62

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.

2) Test the brakes by carefully starting andstopping on the shoulder of the road.

3) If you determine that it is safe, drivecautiously at low speed to the nearestdealer for repairs,

or4) Have the vehicle towed to the nearest

dealer for repairs.

NOTE:Because the disc brake system is self-adjusting, the fluid level will drop as thebrake pads become worn.Replenishing the brake fluid reservoir isconsidered normal periodic maintenance.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

65D529

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the light comes on briefly soyou can check that the light is working. Ifthe light stays on, or comes on when driv-ing, there may be something wrong withthe ABS.

If the ABS light and the brake systemwarning light stay on, or come on simulta-neously when driving, then there may besomething wrong with both the rear brakeproportioning valve function and anti-lockfunction of the ABS.

If one of these happens, have the systeminspected by your SUZUKI dealer. If theABS becomes inoperative, the brake sys-tem will function as an ordinary brake sys-tem that has no ABS.

For details of the ABS, refer to “Anti-LockBrake System (ABS)” in the “OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE” section.

SLIP Indicator Light (if equipped)

52KM133

ESP® is a registered trademark of DaimlerAG.

This light blinks 5 times per second whenone of the ESP® systems other than ABSis activated. If this light blinks, drive care-fully.

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the light comes on briefly soyou can check that the light is working. Ifthe light stays on, or comes on when driv-ing and remains on, there may be some-thing wrong with the ESP® systems (otherthan ABS). You should have the systeminspected by an authorized SUZUKIdealer.

WARNINGRemember that stopping distancemay be longer, you may have to pushharder on the pedal, and the pedalmay go down farther than normal.

WARNINGIf any of the following conditionsoccur, you should immediately askyour SUZUKI dealer to inspect thebrake system.• If the brake system warning light

does not go out after the parkingbrake has been fully released.

• If the brake system warning lightdoes not come on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON”position.

• If the brake system warning lightcomes on at any time during vehi-cle operation.

2-63

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

NOTE:When you disconnect and re-connect thebattery, ESP® system functions other thanABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-tor light will blink 1 time per second. Fordetails on how to reactive the ESP® sys-tems, refer to “SLIP Indicator Light” in the“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.For details of the ESP® systems, refer to“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” inthe “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-tion.

“ESP” (Electronic Stability Program) Warning Light (if equipped)

66J031

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the light comes on briefly soyou can check that the light is working. Ifthe light stays on, or comes on when driv-ing, there may be something wrong withthe ESP® systems (other than ABS). Youshould have the system inspected by anauthorized SUZUKI dealer.

For details of the ESP® systems, refer to“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” inthe “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-tion.

“ESP OFF” Indicator Light (if equipped)

66J032


When the “ESP OFF” switch is pushed toturn off the ESP® systems (other thanABS), the “ESP OFF” light comes on andstays on.

For details of the ESP® systems, refer to“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” inthe “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-tion.

WARNINGThe ESP® systems cannot preventaccidents. Always drive carefully.

2-64

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Oil Pressure Light

50G051

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position, andgoes out when the engine is started. Thelight will come on and remain on if there isinsufficient oil pressure. If the light comeson when driving, pull off the road as soonas you can and stop the engine. Check theoil level and add oil if necessary. If there isenough oil, the lubrication system shouldbe inspected by your SUZUKI dealerbefore you drive the vehicle again.

Charging Light

50G052

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position, andgoes out when the engine is started. Thelight will come on and remain on if there issomething wrong with the battery chargingsystem. If the light comes on when theengine is running, the charging systemshould be inspected immediately by yourSUZUKI dealer.

Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

60G049

If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position, this light will come on and thenblink. When the light comes on, a buzzerwill also sound intermittently for about 6seconds. The reminder will repeat severaltimes under certain conditions until thedriver’s seat belt is buckled. After repeatingseveral times, the reminder will be can-celed even if the driver’s seat belt remainsunbuckled.

For details about the seat belt reminder,refer to “Seat Belts and Child RestraintSystems” in this section.

CAUTION• If you operate the engine with this

light on, severe engine damage canresult.

• Do not rely on the Oil PressureLight to indicate the need to addoil. Be sure to periodically checkthe engine oil level.

WARNINGIt is absolutely essential that thedriver and passengers wear their seatbelts at all times. Persons who arenot wearing seat belts have a muchgreater risk of injury if an accidentoccurs. Make a regular habit of buck-ling your seat belt before putting thekey in the ignition.

2-65

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

AIR BAG Light

63J030

This light monitors inflators, crash sensors,seat belt pretensioners, the front passen-ger sensing system, and correspondingelectrical circuits.This light blinks or comes on for severalseconds when the ignition switch is turnedto the “ON” position so you can check if thelight is working. The light will come on andstay on if there is a problem in the air bagsystem or the seat belt pretensioner sys-tem.

Malfunction Indicator Light

65D530

Your vehicle has a computer-controlledemission control system. A malfunctionindicator light is provided on the instrumentpanel to indicate when it is necessary tohave the emission control system serviced.The malfunction indicator light comes onwhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position to let you know the light isworking and goes out when the engine isstarted.

If the malfunction indicator light comes onor blinks when the engine is running, ser-vice to the emission control system is nec-essary. Bring the vehicle to your SUZUKIdealer to have the emission control systemserviced right away and avoid hard accel-eration until the service is performed.Also, if the light comes on, there may besomething wrong with the continuouslyvariable transaxle system. Have the sys-tem inspected by an authorized SUZUKIdealer.

NOTE:If the fuel filler cap is not installed fully, theelectrical system gets wet (such as by driv-ing through a deep puddle of water) or thefuel tank gets nearly empty, the malfunc-tion indicator light may come on. If so, thelight will go off after driving a few timesafter the fuel filler cap is installed fully, theelectrical system dries out or the fuel tankis filled.

WARNINGIf the AIR BAG light does not blink orcome on when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position or stayson or comes on when driving, the airbag system or the seat belt preten-sioner system may not work properly.Have both systems inspected by anauthorized SUZUKI dealer.

CAUTIONContinuing to drive the vehicle whenthe malfunction indicator light is onor blinking can cause permanentdamage to the vehicle’s emissioncontrol system, and can affect fueleconomy and driveability.

2-66

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Low Fuel Warning Light

54G343

If this light comes on, fill the fuel tankimmediately.When this light comes on, a ding soundsonce to remind you to fill the fuel.If you do not fill the fuel, a ding soundsevery time when the ignition switch isturned to “ON”.

NOTE:The activation point of this light variesdepending on road conditions (for exam-ple, slope or curve) and driving conditionsbecause of fuel moving in the tank.

Open Door Warning Light

54G391

This light remains on until all doors (includ-ing the tailgate of SX4) are completelyclosed.

If any door (including the tailgate of SX4) isopen when the vehicle is moving, a dingsounds to remind you to close all doorscompletely.

“CRUISE” Indicator Light (if equipped)

52D113

When the cruise control system is on, thislight will be on.

“SET” Indicator Light (if equipped)

65D474

When the vehicle’s speed is controlled bythe cruise control system, this light will beon.

Keyless Start System Indicator Light (if equipped)

80JM122

When you push the ignition switch for vehi-cle with the keyless start system, this lightwill come on in blue or red. If this lightcomes on in blue, you can turn the ignitionswitch without using an ignition key. If thislight comes on in red, you cannot turn theignition switch without using an ignitionkey. For details, refer to “Ignition Switch” inthe “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-tion.

If this light blinks in red, it reminds you thatthe remote controller is not in the vehicle.For details, refer to “Keyless Start SystemRemote Controller/Keyless Entry SystemTransmitter” in this section.

2-67

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Illumination Indicator Light

64J045

This indicator light comes on while theposition lights, tail light and/or the head-lights are on.

Turn Signal Indicators

50G055

When you turn on the left or right turn sig-nals, the corresponding green arrow on theinstrument panel will flash along with therespective turn signal lights.When you turn on the hazard warningswitch, both arrows will flash along with allof the turn signal lights.

High Beam Indicator Light

50G056

This indicator comes on when headlighthigh beams are turned on.

intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) AUTO Indicator Light (if equipped)

79J040

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the light comes on briefly soyou can check that the light is working.When the 2WD/i-AWD switch is in the “i-AWD AUTO” mode with the ignition switchin the “ON” position, the light comes onand stays on.

If the light and the “i-AWD LOCK” indicatorlight stay on or come on simultaneouslywhen driving, there may be somethingwrong with the i-AWD system. Have the

system inspected by an authorizedSUZUKI dealer.

If the oil temperature of the parts for i-AWDsystem is high, this light will blink. The “i-AWD AUTO” or “i-AWD LOCK” mode willbe changed to the “2WD” mode automati-cally to prevent a damage of the parts for i-AWD system.

NOTE:If you restart the engine, the light will stopblinking temporarily.

For details, refer to “Using the 2WD/i-AWDSwitch” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI-CLE” section.

NOTE:When the vehicle speed is increased, the“i-AWD LOCK” mode will be changed tothe “i-AWD AUTO” mode automatically.The “i-AWD AUTO” indicator light will comeon and stay on.

2-68

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) LOCK Indicator Light (if equipped)

79J100


The light comes on when the 2WD/i-AWDswitch is changed to the “i-AWD LOCK”mode from the “i-AWD AUTO” mode.

If the light and the “i-AWD AUTO” indicatorlight stay on or come on simultaneouslywhen driving, there may be somethingwrong with the i-AWD system. Have thesystem inspected by an authorizedSUZUKI dealer.

NOTE:• When the vehicle speed is increased,

the “i-AWD LOCK” mode will be changedto the “i-AWD AUTO” mode automati-cally. The “i-AWD AUTO” indicator lightwill come on and stay on.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the“OFF” position, the “i-AWD LOCK” modeis canceled.

For details of the “i-AWD LOCK” mode,refer to “Using the 2WD/i-AWD Switch” inthe “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-tion.

Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) Indi-cator Light (if equipped)

60B245

With the D.R.L. system, the headlightslight, but are dimmer than the low beam,when the following three conditions are allmet. Whenever the D.R.L. system is oper-ating, the D.R.L. indicator light remains on.

Conditions for D.R.L. system operation1) The engine is running.2) The parking brake is released.3) The headlights are off.

Speedometer

80J2063

The speedometer indicates vehicle speedin km/h and mph.

CAUTIONDo not operate your vehicle in “i-AWD LOCK” mode on dry hard sur-faces.

EXAMPLE

2-69

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Tachometer

80JM101

The tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute.

Fuel Gauge

80JM102

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, this gauge gives an approximateindication of the amount of fuel in the fueltank. “F” stands for full and “E” stands forempty.

If the indicator gets off the graduation of“E” (not character “E”), refill the tank assoon as possible.

NOTE:The indicator moves a little depending onroad conditions (for example, slope orcurve) and driving conditions because offuel moving in the tank.

If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,fill the fuel tank immediately.When the low fuel warning light (1) comeson, a ding sounds once to remind you to fillthe fuel.If you do not fill the fuel, a ding soundsevery time when the ignition switch isturned to “ON”.

NOTE:The activation point of the low fuel warninglight (1) varies depending on road condi-tions (for example, slope or curve) anddriving conditions because of fuel movingin the tank.

The mark (2) indicates that the fuel fillerdoor is located on the left side of the vehi-cle.

CAUTIONNever drive with the engine speedindicator in the red zone or severeengine damage can result.

EXAMPLE (2)

(1)

CAUTIONAvoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damag-ing the catalytic converter.

2-70

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Temperature Gauge

80JM103

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, this gauge indicates the enginecoolant temperature. Under normal drivingconditions, the indicator should stay withinthe normal, acceptable temperature rangebetween “H” and “C”. If the indicatorapproaches “H”, overheating is indicated.Follow the instructions for engine overheat-ing in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE” sec-tion.

Information display

80JM104

(1) Trip meter selector knob(2) Indicator selector knob(3) Information display

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the information display shows thefollowing information.

Display (A)Instantaneous fuel consumption

Display (B)Trip meter / Average fuel consumption / Driving range / Thermometer

Display (C)Transaxle selector position indicator (for CVT)

Display (D)Odometer / Illumination control setting

Display (E)Clock (if equipped)

Instantaneous Fuel ConsumptionThe display (A) shows instantaneous fuelconsumption with a bar graph only whenthe vehicle is moving.

80J2026

NOTE:• The display does not show the bar graph

unless the vehicle is moving.• The indicated maximum value of instan-

taneous fuel consumption is 80. Nomore than 80 will be indicated on the dis-play even if the actual instantaneous fuelconsumption is higher.

• The indication on the display may bedelayed if fuel consumption is greatlyaffected by driving conditions.

• The display shows estimated values.Indications may not be the same asactual values.

CAUTIONContinuing to drive the vehicle whenengine overheating is indicated canresult in severe engine damage.

(1) (2)(3)

(D)

(B)(A)

(C)

(E)

EXAMPLE

2-71

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

You can turn off or on the indication ofinstantaneous fuel consumption accordingto the following instruction.

80J2027

1) Change the display (B) to the drivingrange by pushing the indicator selectorknob (2).

80J2028

2) While pushing and holding the tripmeter selector knob (1), turn the indica-tor selector knob (2) to turn off or on the

indication of instantaneous fuel con-sumption.

NOTE:When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the indication of theinstantaneous fuel consumption will bereinitialized. Change the indication again toyour preference.

Trip meter / Average Fuel Consumption /Driving Range / ThermometerWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the display (B) shows one of thefollowing five indications, trip meter A, tripmeter B, average fuel consumption, drivingrange or thermometer.

To switch the display indication (B), pushthe trip meter selector knob (1) or the indi-cator selector knob (2) quickly. 80J2029

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(Initial setting)

WARNINGIf you attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving, you could lose controlof the vehicle.

Do not attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving.

Push the trip meter selectorknob (1).

Push the indicator selectorknob (2).

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

EXAMPLE

2-72

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

(a) Trip meter A(b) Trip meter B(c) Average fuel consumption(d) Driving range(e) Thermometer

NOTE:• Indications will change when you push

and release a knob.• The display shows estimated values.

Indications may not be the same asactual values.

Trip meterThe trip meter can be used to measure thedistance traveled on short trips or betweenfuel stops.You can use the trip meter A or trip meter Bindependently.

To reset the trip meter to zero, push andhold the trip meter selector knob (1) for awhile when the display shows the tripmeter.

NOTE:The indicated maximum value of the tripmeter is 9999.9. When you run past themaximum value, the indicated value willreturn to 0.0.

Average fuel consumptionIf you selected average fuel consumptionthe last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-play shows the last value of average fuelconsumption from previous driving whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position. Unless you reset the value ofaverage fuel consumption, the display indi-cates the value of average fuel consump-tion which includes average fuelconsumption during previous driving.

To reset the average fuel consumption tozero, push and hold the indicator selectorknob (2) for a while when the displayshows the average fuel consumption.

NOTE:When you reset the indication or reconnectthe negative (–) terminal to the battery, thevalue of average fuel consumption will beshown after driving for a while.

Driving rangeIf you selected driving range the last timeyou drove the vehicle, the display indicates“---” for a few seconds and then indicatesthe current driving range when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position.

The driving range shown in the display isthe approximate distance you can driveuntil the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based oncurrent driving conditions.

When the remaining fuel in fuel tankreaches a low level, the display “---” willappear.

If the low fuel warning light comes on, fillthe fuel tank immediately regardless of thevalue of driving range shown in the display.

As the driving range after refueling is cal-culated based on the most recent drivingcondition, the value is different each timeyou refuel.

NOTE:• If you refuel when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position, the driving range maynot indicate the correct value.

• When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the value of drivingrange will be shown after driving for awhile.



2-73

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

ThermometerThe thermometer indicates the outsidetemperature.

80J2030

If the outside temperature nears freezing,the mark (f) will appear on the display.

NOTE:• The outside temperature indication is not

the actual outside temperature whendriving at low speed, or when stopped.

• If there is something wrong with the ther-mometer, or just after the ignition switchis turned to the “ON” position, the displaymay not indicate the outside tempera-ture.

• The mark (f) will appear whenever theoutside temperature is near freezing,even if the display does not show thethermometer.

To change the unit of temperature, whilepushing and holding the trip meter selectorknob (1), turn the indicator selector knob(2).

80J2031

NOTE:When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the unit of temperaturewill be reinitialized. Change the unit againto your preference.

Transaxle selector position indicator(for CVT)

80J2032

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the display (C) indicates the gearposition (g).When using the manual mode, the display(C) indicates the manual mode indicator(h).

For details on how to use the transaxle,refer to “Using the Transaxle” in the“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

(f)EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(Initial setting)

(h) (g)EXAMPLE

2-74

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Odometer / Illumination Control SettingWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the display (D) shows the odome-ter.If you turn the indicator selector knob (2)clockwise or counterclockwise, the displaywill change to the illumination control set-ting.

OdometerThe odometer records the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

Illumination control settingWhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the instrument panel lightscome on.

Your vehicle has a system to automaticallydim the brightness of the instrument panellights when the position lights or headlightsare on.

You can change the brightness of theinstrument panel lights regardless ofwhether the position lights or headlightsare off or on.

To increase the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the indicator selec-tor knob (1) clockwise.To reduce the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights, turn the indicator selectorknob (1) counterclockwise.

80JM039

CAUTIONKeep track of your odometer readingand check the maintenance scheduleregularly for required services.Increased wear or damage to certainparts can result from failure to per-form required services at the propermileage intervals.

(Brightest)

(Initial setting)

(Dimmest)

2-75

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

NOTE:• If you push the indicator selector knob or

do not turn the knob for more than 5 sec-onds while activating the illuminationcontrol, the illumination control will becanceled automatically and the display(D) will show the odometer indication.

• You can change the brightness when theposition lights or headlights are on evenif the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

• When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the brightness of theinstrument panel lights will be reinitial-ized. Readjust the brightness accordingto your preference.

NOTE:If you select the lowest brightness levelwhen the position lights or headlights areon, the instrument panel lights other thanmeter lights are turned off.

Clock (if equipped)When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the display (E) shows the time.

To change the time indication: 1) Push the trip meter selector knob (1)

and the indicator selector knob (2)together.

2) To change the hour indication, turn theindicator selector knob (2) left or rightrepeatedly when the hour indicationflashes. To change the hour indicationquickly, turn and hold the indicatorselector knob (2). To set the hour indi-cation, push the the indicator selectorknob (2) and the minute indication willflash.

3) To change the minute indication, turnthe indicator selector knob (2) left orright repeatedly when the minute indi-cation flashes. To change the minuteindication quickly, turn and hold theindicator selector knob (2). To set theminute indication, push the indicatorselector knob (2).

NOTE:When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the clock indication willbe reinitialized. Change the indicationagain to your preference.

Lighting Control Lever

65D611





WARNINGTo avoid possible injury, do not oper-ate controls by reaching through thesteering wheel.

2-76

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Lighting Operation

63J308

To turn the lights on or off, twist the knobon the end of the lever. There are threepositions:

OFF (1)All lights are off.

(2)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light and instrument lights are on, butheadlights are off.

(3)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light, instrument lights and headlights are on.

63J309

With the headlights on, push the lever for-ward to switch to the high beams (mainbeams) or pull the lever toward you toswitch to the low beams. When the highbeams (main beams) are on, a light on theinstrument panel will come on. To momen-tarily activate the high beams (mainbeams) as a passing signal, pull the leverslightly toward you and release it when youhave completed the signal.

Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) SystemThe headlights light, but are dimmer thanthe low beam, when the following threeconditions are all met. Also, the D.R.L. indi-cator light on the instrument panel comeson.

Conditions for D.R.L. system operation:1) The engine is running.2) The parking brake is released.3) The headlights are off.

NOTE:Be sure to turn the headlights on at nightor at any time of the day when driving orweather conditions require the headlightsto operate at full brightness and the tail-lights to be on.

Lights “On” reminder (if equipped)A buzzer/chime sounds to remind you toturn off the lights if they are left on whenthe ignition key is removed and the driver’sdoor is opened.

(1)

(2)

(3)

EXAMPLEEXAMPLE

2-77

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped)

64J058

The front fog light comes on when the foglight switch is pushed in with the headlightsare on and the beams set to the low beamposition.

Turn Signal Control Lever

65D611

Turn Signal OperationWith the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion, move the lever up or down to activatethe right or left turn signals.

Normal turn signal

63J310

Move the lever all the way upward or down-ward to signal. When the turn is com-pleted, the signal will cancel and the leverwill return to its normal position.


EXAMPLE

2-78

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Lane change signal

63J311

Some times, such as when changinglanes, the steering wheel is not turned farenough to cancel the turn signal. For con-venience, you can flash the turn signal bymoving the lever part way and holding itthere. The lever will return to its normalposition when you release it.

Hazard Warning Switch

80JM041

Push in the hazard warning switch to acti-vate the hazard warning lights. All turn sig-nal lights and both turn signal indicatorswill flash simultaneously. To turn off thelights, push the switch again.

Use the hazard warning lights to warnother traffic during emergency parking orwhen your vehicle could otherwise becomea traffic hazard.

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever

65D611

EXAMPLE


2-79

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Windshield Wipers

63J301

To turn the windshield wipers on, move thelever down to one of the three operatingpositions. In the “INT” position (ifequipped), the wipers operate intermit-tently. The “INT” position is very convenientfor driving in mist or light rain. In the “LO”position, the wipers operate at a steadylow speed. In the “HI” position, the wipersoperate at a steady high speed. To turn offthe wipers, move the lever back to the“OFF” position.

Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”position, the windshield wipers will turn oncontinuously at low speed.

63J302

If the lever is equipped with the “INT TIME”control, turn the control forward or rear-ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera-tion to the desired interval.

Windshield Washer

63J303

To spray windshield washer fluid, pull thelever toward you. The windshield wiperswill automatically turn on at low speed ifthey are not already on and the “INT” posi-tion is equipped.

MIST

OFF

INT

LO

HI

EXAMPLEEXAMPLE

WARNING• To prevent windshield icing in cold

weather, turn on the defroster toheat the windshield before and dur-ing windshield washer use.

• Do not use radiator antifreeze inthe windshield washer reservoir. Itcan severely impair visibility whensprayed on the windshield, and canalso damage your vehicle’s paint.

EXAMPLE

2-80

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch (if equipped)

63J304

To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rearwiper switch on the end of the lever for-ward to the “ON” position. If your vehicle isequipped the “INT” position, the rear wiperoperates intermittently when you twist theswitch forward to the “INT” position. To turnthe rear wiper off, twist the switch rearwardto the “OFF” position.

To spray window washer fluid, twist theswitch rearward from the “OFF” position, ortwist the switch forward from the “ON” posi-tion. The rear wiper will turn on automati-cally while spraying the window washerfluid.

CAUTIONTo help prevent damage to the wind-shield wiper and washer systemcomponents, you should take the fol-lowing precautions:• Do not continue to hold in the lever

when there is no windshieldwasher fluid being sprayed or thewasher motor can be damaged.

• Do not attempt to remove dirt froma dry windshield with the wipers oryou can damage the windshieldand the wiper blades. Always wetthe windshield with washer fluidbefore operating the wipers.

• Clear ice or packed snow from thewiper blades before using the wip-ers.

• Check the washer fluid level regu-larly. Check it often when theweather is bad.

• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir3/4 full during cold weather to allowroom for expansion if the tempera-ture falls low enough to freeze thesolution.

EXAMPLE

Intermittent wiper

Washer

Wiper

CAUTIONClear ice or snow from the rear win-dow and rear wiper blade beforeusing the rear wiper. Accumulated iceor snow could prevent the wiperblade from moving, causing damageto the wiper motor.

2-81

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

Tilt Steering Lock Lever (if equipped)

63J026

The lock lever is located under the steeringcolumn. To adjust the steering wheelheight:

1) Pull up the lock lever to unlock thesteering column.

2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredheight and lock the steering column bypush down the lock lever.

3) Try moving the steering wheel up anddown to make sure it is securely lockedin position.

Horn

80J2010

Press the horn pad on the steering wheelto sound the horn. The horn will sound withthe ignition switch in any position.

Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors (if equipped) SwitchType 1

80JM042

Type 2

80JM043

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust the steeringwheel height while the vehicle ismoving or you could lose control ofthe vehicle.

LOCK UNLOCK

EXAMPLEEXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

2-82

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

When the rear window is misted, push thisswitch (1) to clear the window.

80JC040

If the outside rearview mirror has the mark(2), it is also equipped with the heated out-side rearview mirrors. When you push theswitch (1), both the heated outside rear-view mirrors and the heated rear windowwill operate simultaneously.

An indicator light will be lit when the defog-ger is on. The defogger will work onlywhen the engine is running. To turn off thedefogger, push the switch (1) again.

NOTE:• The defogger will work only when the

engine is running.• The defogger will automatically turn off

after the defogger remains on for 15 min-utes to prevent discharging of the bat-tery.

(2)

CAUTIONThe heated rear window and theheated outside rearview mirrors (ifequipped) use a large amount of elec-tricity. Be sure to turn off after thewindow and mirrors have becomeclear.

2-83

BEFORE DRIVING

80J23-03E

MEMO

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

3

80J23-03E

60G408

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLEExhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 3-1Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 3-1Ignition Switch ..................................................................... 3-2Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 3-6Pedals ................................................................................... 3-7Starting the Engine ............................................................. 3-8Engine Block Heater (if equipped) ..................................... 3-9Using the Transaxle ............................................................ 3-10Using the 2WD/i-AWD (intelligent All Wheel Drive) Switch (if equipped) ............................................................ 3-16Cruise Control (if equipped) ............................................... 3-18Braking ................................................................................. 3-20Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) (if equipped) ........... 3-23Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........................ 3-26

3-1


80J23-03E

Exhaust Gas Warning

52D334

Daily Inspection ChecklistBefore Driving1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights

and reflectors are clean and unob-structed.

2) Visually check the tires for the followingpoints:

– the depth of the tread groove– abnormal wear, cracks and damage– loose wheel nuts– existence of foreign material such as

nails, stones, etc.Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section for details.3) Look for fluid, oil leaks.

NOTE:It is normal for water to drip from the airconditioning system after use.

4) Make sure the hood is fully closed andlatched.

5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,brake lights and horn for proper opera-tion.

6) Lock all doors.7) Adjust the seat and adjustable head

restraints (if equipped).8) Check the brake pedal.9) Adjust the mirrors.10)Make sure that you and all passengers

have properly fastened your seat belts.11)Make sure that all warning lights come

on as the key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion.

WARNINGAvoid breathing exhaust gases.Exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide, a potentially lethal gas that iscolorless and odorless. Since carbonmonoxide is difficult to detect byitself, be sure to take the followingprecautions to help prevent carbonmonoxide from entering your vehicle.• Do not leave the engine running in

garages or other confined areas.(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• Do not park with the engine run-

ning for a long period of time, evenin an open area. If it is necessary tosit for a short time in a parked vehi-cle with the engine running, makesure the air intake selector is set to“FRESH AIR” and the blower is athigh speed.

• Avoid operating the vehicle withthe tailgate or trunk open. If it isnecessary to operate the vehiclewith the tailgate or trunk open,make sure the sunroof (if equipped)and all windows are closed, and theblower is at high speed with the airintake selector set to “FRESH AIR”.

• To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe air inlet grille in front of thewindshield clear of snow, leaves orother obstructions at all times.

• Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clearof snow and other material to helpreduce the buildup of exhaustgases under the vehicle. This isparticularly important when parkedin blizzard conditions.

• Have the exhaust system inspectedperiodically for damage and leaks.Any damage or leaks should berepaired immediately.

Ignition Switch: 8

3-2


80J23-03E

12)Check all gauges.13)Make sure that the BRAKE light turns

off when the parking brake is released.

Once a week, or each time you fill your fueltank, perform the following under-hoodchecks:

1) Engine oil level2) Coolant level3) Brake fluid level4) Power steering (if equipped) fluid level5) Windshield washer fluid level6) Hood latch operation

Pull the hood release handle inside thevehicle. Make sure that you cannotopen the hood all the way withoutreleasing the secondary latch. Be sureto close the hood securely after check-ing for proper latch operation. See theitem “All latches, hinges and locks” of“CHASSIS AND BODY” in the “PeriodicMaintenance Schedule” section in the“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”section for lubrication schedule.

Once a month, or each time you fill yourfuel tank, check the tire pressure using atire pressure gauge. Also check the tirepressure of the spare tire.

Ignition Switch

65D611

WARNINGMake sure the hood is fully closedand latched before driving. If it is not,it can fly up unexpectedly duringdriving, obstructing your view andresulting in an accident.


Ignition Switch: 8

3-3


80J23-03E

Vehicle Without Keyless Start System

60B041

The ignition switch has the following fourpositions:

LOCKThis is the normal parking position. It is theonly position in which the key can beremoved.

Manual transaxle

60A055

• Manual transaxle vehicles You must push in the key to turn it to the“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, andprevents normal use of the steeringwheel after the key is removed.

• CVT vehicles The gearshift lever must be in the “P”(Park) position to turn the key to the“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition andprevents normal use of the steeringwheel and gearshift lever.

To release the steering lock, insert the keyand turn it clockwise to one of the otherpositions. If you have trouble turning thekey to unlock the steering, try turning thesteering wheel slightly to the right or leftwhile turning the key.

ACCAccessories such as the radio can oper-ate, but the engine is off.

ONThis is the normal operating position. Allelectrical systems are on.

STARTThis is the position for starting the engineusing the starter motor. The key should bereleased from this position as soon as theengine starts.

Ignition key reminderA buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to remove the ignition key if it is in theignition switch when the driver’s door isopened.

Push

Turn to “LOCK”

Lighting/Turn Signal Control Lever: 8

3-4


80J23-03E

Vehicle With Keyless Start System

56KN076

The ignition switch can be operated with-out using an ignition key when the remotecontroller is in an area of the vehicle otherthan the rear luggage area. To turn theignition switch, first push in the switch.

• Manual transaxle vehicleYou must push in the ignition switch toturn it from the “LOCK” position to the“ACC” position. To return to the “LOCK”position from the “ACC” position, turn theignition switch counterclockwise whilepushing in the switch.

• CVT vehicleTo turn the ignition switch, push theswitch.

80J2016

If the keyless start system blue indicatorlight illuminates on the instrument cluster,you can turn the ignition switch. If the redindicator light illuminates, you cannot turnthe ignition switch.

NOTE:• The ignition switch can be turned to the

“ACC” position when the keyless startsystem blue indicator light illuminates.The blue indicator light will illuminate forseveral seconds when you push in theignition switch and then will turn off toprotect the system. In this case, youmust release the ignition switch andpush it in again to illuminate the blueindicator light.

• If the keyless start system red indicatorlight illuminates, the remote controllermay not be in the vehicle or the batteryof the remote controller may be unreli-able.

NOTE:• If the battery of the remote controller

runs down or there are strong radiowaves or noise, the operating range maybe narrower or the remote controller maybe inoperative.

• If the remote controller is too close to thedoor glass, it may not operate.

• The ignition switch may not turn whenthe remote controller is on the instru-ment panel, in the glove box, in a stor-age compartment, in the sun visor or onthe floor.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONThe remote controller is a sensitiveelectronic instrument. To avoid dam-aging the remote controller:• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-


• Keep the remote controller awayfrom magnetic objects such as atelevision.

Lighting/Turn Signal Control Lever: 8Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever: 8

3-5


80J23-03E

If you leave any of the doors open with theignition switch in the “ACC” position for awhile (and no key inserted), the enginemay not start when you turn the ignitionswitch to “START”. If the engine does notstart, close all doors completely or turn theignition switch back to the “LOCK” position,then start the engine.

The ignition switch has the following fourpositions:

LOCK (1)This is the normal parking position. It is theonly position in which the key can beremoved. It locks the ignition, and preventsnormal use of the steering wheel.

For vehicles with a CVT, the gearshift levermust be in the “P” (Park) position to turnthe key to the “LOCK” position.

To release the steering lock, turn the igni-tion switch clockwise to one of the otherpositions. If you have trouble turning theignition switch to unlock the steering, tryturning the steering wheel slightly to theright or left while turning the switch.

• Manual transaxle vehicleYou must push in the ignition switch toturn it from the “LOCK” position to the“ACC” position. To return to the “LOCK”position from the “ACC” position, turn theignition switch counterclockwise whilepushing in the switch.

• CVT vehicleTo turn the ignition switch, push theswitch.

ACC (2)Accessories such as the radio can oper-ate, but the engine is off.

ON (3)This is the normal operating position. Allelectrical systems are on.

START (4)This is the position for starting the engineusing the starter motor. The switch shouldbe released from this position as soon asthe engine starts.

Ignition switch reminder(When using the keyless start system)A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to return the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position if it is in the “ACC” positionwhen the driver’s door is opened.

You can also turn the ignition switch byinserting the ignition key into the slot.

80JM139

The ignition switch cap (1) is installed tomake the ignition switch turn easily.If you use the ignition key to turn the igni-tion switch, remove the cap (1) by pinchingboth side of the cap and pull it out.

NOTE:If you remove the cap, be careful not tolose it.

Ignition key reminder(When using the ignition key)A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to remove the ignition key if it is in theignition switch when the driver’s door isopened.

(1)

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever: 8Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch: 8

3-6


80J23-03E

81A297S

Parking Brake Lever

52D122

(1) To set(2) To release(3) To release

The parking brake lever is located betweenthe seats. To set the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down and pull the parkingbrake lever all the way up. To release theparking brake, hold the brake pedal down,pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,push the button on the end of the lever withyour thumb and lower the lever to its origi-nal position.

WARNING• For manual transaxle vehicles,

never remove the ignition key whilethe vehicle is moving. The steeringwheel will lock and you will not beable to steer the vehicle.

• Always remove the ignition keywhen leaving the vehicle even ifonly for a short time. Also do notleave children or pets alone in aparked vehicle. Unattended chil-dren could cause accidental move-ment of the vehicle or could tamperwith power windows. Children orpets could suffer from heatstrokein warm or hot weather, whichcould result in severe injury oreven death.

CAUTION• Do not turn the starter motor for

more than 15 seconds at a time. Ifthe engine does not start, wait 15seconds before trying again. If theengine does not start after severalattempts, check the fuel and igni-tion systems or consult yourSUZUKI dealer.

• Do not leave the ignition switch inthe “ON” position if the engine isnot running or the battery will dis-charge.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch: 8Tilt Steering Lock Lever: 6Cruise Control: 7, 8

3-7


80J23-03E

For CVT vehicles, always set the parkingbrake before moving the gearshift lever tothe “P” (Park) position. If you park on anincline and shift into “P” before you set theparking brake, the weight of the vehiclemay make it difficult to shift out of “P” whenyou are ready to drive the vehicle. Whenpreparing to drive the vehicle, move thegearshift lever out of the “P” position beforereleasing the parking brake.

PedalsManual transaxle

79J072

CVT

79J154

WARNING• Never drive your vehicle with the

parking brake set: rear brake effec-tiveness can be reduced from over-heating, brake life may beshortened or permanent brakedamage may result.

• If the parking brake does not holdthe vehicle securely or does notfully release, have your vehicleinspected immediately by an autho-rized SUZUKI dealer.

WARNINGAlways set the parking brake fullybefore leaving your vehicle or it mayroll, causing injury or damage. Whenparking, make sure the gearshiftlever for manual transaxle vehicles isin 1st gear or “R” (Reverse) and thegearshift lever for CVT vehicles is in“P” (Park). Remember, even thoughthe transaxle is in gear or in Park, youmust set the parking brake fully.

(1) (2) (3)

EXAMPLE

(2) (3)

EXAMPLE

Cruise Control: 7, 8

3-8


80J23-03E

Clutch Pedal (1)(For manual transaxle)The clutch pedal is used to disengage thedrive to the wheels when starting theengine, stopping or shifting the gearshiftlever. Depressing the pedal disengagesthe clutch.

Brake Pedal (2)Your SUZUKI vehicle is equipped witheither front and rear disc brakes or frontdisc brakes and rear drum brakes.Depressing the brake pedal applies bothsets of brakes.

You may hear occasional brake squealwhen you apply the brakes. This is a nor-mal condition caused by environmentalfactors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.

Accelerator Pedal (3)This pedal controls the speed of theengine. Depressing the accelerator pedalincreases power output and speed.

Starting the EngineBefore Starting the Engine1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.2) Manual Transaxle – Shift into “N” (Neu-

tral) and depress the clutch pedal allthe way to the floor. Hold the clutchpedal while starting the engine. CVT – If the gearshift lever is not in “P”(Park) position, shift into “P”. (If youneed to re-start the engine while thevehicle is moving, shift into “N”.)

NOTE:The engine of manual transaxle vehicle willnot start unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

NOTE:CVT vehicles have a starter interlockdevice which is designed to keep thestarter from operating if the transaxle is inany of the drive positions.

CAUTIONDo not drive with your foot resting onthe clutch pedal. It could result inexcessive clutch wear, clutch dam-age, or unexpected loss of enginebraking.

WARNINGIf brake squeal is excessive andoccurs each time the brakes areapplied, you should have the brakeschecked by your SUZUKI dealer.

WARNINGDo not “ride” the brakes by applyingthem continuously or resting yourfoot on the pedal. This will result inoverheating of the brakes whichcould cause unpredictable brakingaction, longer stopping distances orpermanent brake damage.

WARNINGMake sure that the parking brake isset fully and the transaxle is in Neu-tral (or Park for vehicles with a CVT)before attempting to start the engine.

Cruise Control: 7, 8Remote Audio Controls:Horn: 6

3-9


80J23-03E

Starting a Cold EngineWith your foot off the accelerator pedal,crank the engine by turning the ignition keyto “START”. Release the key when theengine starts.

If the engine does not start after 15 sec-onds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,then press down the accelerator pedal to1/3 of its travel and try cranking the engineagain. Release the key and acceleratorpedal when the engine starts.

If the engine still does not start, try holdingthe accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor while cranking. This should clear theengine if it is flooded.

If you are unable to start the engine usingthis procedure, consult your SUZUKIdealer.

Starting a Warm EngineUse the same procedure as for “Starting aCold Engine”.

Engine Block Heater (if equipped)

80J2064

The engine block heater will help you startthe engine more easily in very coldweather (–18°C (0°F) or below). To use theengine block heater:1) Turn off the engine.2) Open the engine hood.3) Untie the block heater cord and remove

the block heater plug cap. When theengine block heater is not in use,ensure the heater cord is secured toprevent contact with any moving parts.

4) Using a heavy-duty, three-pronggrounded extension cord, plug thefemale end into the block heater socketand the male end into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

NOTE:Activate the heater at least four hoursbefore you start the engine. However, asthe heating time varies depending on theambient temperature and other factors,adjust the time by observing the enginecranking condition.

After using the block heater:1) Unplug the extension cord and reinstall

the plug cap.2) Tie the block heater cord back to its

original position.

CAUTION• Stop turning the starter immedi-

ately after the engine has started orthe starter system can be dam-aged.

• Do not crank the engine for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If theengine doesn’t start on the first try,wait about 15 seconds before try-ing again.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGTo avoid serious personal injurycaused by electrical shock or fire:• Do not plug the cord into a non-

grounded outlet. Only use a prop-erly grounded three-prong 110-voltAC outlet.

• Do not use a 2-wire (non-grounded)extension cord.

• Only use a heavy-duty, three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15amps.

3-10


80J23-03E

3) Close the engine hood securely beforestarting the engine.

Using the TransaxleManual Transaxle

80J2081

Starting offTo start off, depress the clutch pedal all theway to the floor and shift into 1st gear.After releasing the parking brake, graduallyrelease the clutch. When you hear achange in the engine’s sound, slowly pressthe accelerator while continuing to gradu-ally release the clutch.

ShiftingAll forward gears are synchronized, whichprovides for quiet, and easy shifting.Always depress the clutch pedal all theway to the floor before shifting gears. Keepthe engine speed does not rise into the redzone of the tachometer.

80J2082

Reverse gear: with lifting up ring, shift thegearshift lever to the right, engage gear.

CAUTIONSecure the block heater cord back toits original position or to the routedposition. A loose cord could getcaught in the engine accessory drivebelt(s) or other moving parts.

EXAMPLE

3-11


80J23-03E

Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT)

80J2065

Gearshift lever

80J2035

WARNING• Reduce your speed and downshift

to a lower gear before going downa long or steep hill. Downshiftingwill allow the engine to providebraking. Avoid riding the brakes orthey may overheat, resulting inbrake failure.

• When driving on slippery roads, besure to slow down before down-shifting. Large and suddenchanges in engine speed maycause loss of traction, which couldcause you to lose control.

• Make sure that the vehicle is com-pletely stopped before you shiftinto reverse.

CAUTION• To help avoid clutch damage, do

not use the clutch pedal as a foot-rest while driving or use the clutchto keep the vehicle stationary on aslope. Depress the clutch fullywhen shifting.

• When shifting or starting off, do notrace the engine. Racing the enginecan shorten engine life and affectsmooth shifting.

WARNINGAlways depress the brake pedalbefore shifting from “P” (Park) (or“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station-ary) to a forward or reverse gear, tohelp prevent the vehicle from movingunexpectedly when you shift.

3-12


80J23-03E

The gearshift lever has a lock mechanismto help prevent accidental shifting. To shiftthe gearshift lever:

80J2036

NOTE:• Always shift the gearshift lever without

pushing in the lock button (1) exceptwhen you shift from “P” to “R”, from “N”to “R” or from “R” to “P”. If you alwayspush in the lock button (1) when shiftingthe gearshift lever, you could shift into“P” or “R” by mistake.

• If driver’s or passenger’s knee hits thegearshift lever while driving, the levercould move and the gear could bechanged unexpectedly.

Use the gearshift lever positions asdescribed below:

P (Park)Use this position to lock the transaxlewhen the vehicle is parked or when start-ing the engine. Shift into Park only whenthe vehicle is completely stationary.

R (Reverse)Use this position to reverse the vehiclefrom stop. Make sure that vehicle is com-pletely stationary before shifting intoReverse.

N (Neutral)Use this position for starting the engine ifthe engine stalls and you need to restart itwhile the vehicle is moving. You may alsoshift into Neutral and depress the brakepedal to hold the vehicle stationary duringidling.

Shift with the lock button (1)pushed in and the brake pedaldepressed.

Shift with the lock button (1)pushed in.

Shift without the lock button (1)pushed in.

(1)

CAUTIONDo not shift the gearshift lever into“R” while moving forward, or thetransaxle may be damaged. If youshift into “R” when the vehicle speedis over 6mph (10km/h), the transaxlewill not shift into reverse.

3-13


80J23-03E

D (Drive)Use this position for all normal driving.

With the gearshift lever in “D” range youcan get an automatic downshift by press-ing the accelerator pedal. The higher thevehicle speed is, the more you need topress the accelerator pedal to get a down-shift.

M (manual mode)Use this position for driving in the manualmode. Refer to “Manual mode” later in this sectionfor details on how to use the manual mode.

Manual modeThe CVT can shift gears automatically.When using the manual mode, you canshift gears in the same manner as conven-tional manual transaxle. To use the manual mode, shift the gearshiftlever from “D” to “M”.

80J2037

80J2073

(1) Manual mode indicator(2) Gear position

The information display shows the manualmode indicator (1) and the current gearposition (2).

NOTE:• The indicated gear position on the infor-

mation display when you shift from “D” to“M” is the gear position that was selectedautomatically when the gearshift leverwas in “D”.

• You can change to the manual modetemporarily by pulling the shift paddle (ifequipped) on the steering wheel towardyou when the gearshift lever is in “D”.

Shifting in the manual modeYou can shift gears from 1st to 6th depend-ing on driving speed.

NOTE:• When the engine is revved, the gear is

shifted up automatically to prevent dam-age to the engine and the transaxle. Ifthe CVT fluid becomes hot such aswhen driving on up hill, the engine speedat which shifting occurs may be lowerthan usual.

• When the driving speed becomes slow,the gear shifts down automatically, andwhen the vehicle stops, the gear positionwill be in 1st gear without shifting thegearshift lever.

• If you depress the accelerator pedal acertain amount, the gear shifts downautomatically even if the gearshift leveris in the manual mode.

CAUTIONBe sure to take the following precau-tions to help avoid damage to theCVT:• Make sure that the vehicle is com-

pletely stationary before shiftinginto “P” or “R”.

• Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”,“D” or “M” when the engine is run-ning above idle speed.

• Do not rev the engine with the tran-saxle in a drive position (“R”, “D”or “M”) and the front wheels notmoving.

• Do not use the accelerator to holdthe vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi-cle’s brakes.

(1) (2)EXAMPLE

3-14


80J23-03E

NOTE:When you shift gears, the gear may notshift to the desired position. This is tomaintain good drivability and to protect thetransaxle.

Using the gearshift lever

80J2039

(1) “+” side (shift up)(2) “–” side (shift down)

To shift up, pull the gearshift lever to the “+”side (rearward). When you remove yourhand from the gearshift lever, the lever willreturn to the “M” position automatically.

To shift down, push the gearshift lever tothe “–” side (forward). When you removeyour hand from the gearshift lever, thelever will return to the “M” position auto-matically.

NOTE:To shift gears continuously, remove yourhand from the gearshift lever, then shift thelever again. You cannot shift gears continu-ously while holding the lever in the “+” or “–” position.

Using the shift paddle (if equipped)

80J1358

To shift up, pull the “+” side shift paddle,located on right side of the steering wheel,toward you. When you remove your fingerfrom the switch, the switch will return to theoriginal position.

80J1359

To shift down, pull the “–” side shift paddle,located on left side of the steering wheel,toward you. When you remove your fingerfrom the switch, the switch will return to theoriginal position.

NOTE:• To shift gears continuously, remove your

finger from the shift paddle, then pull theshift paddle again. You cannot shiftgears continuously while holding theshift paddle toward you.

• When you pull the both “+” and “–” shiftpaddle simultaneously, the gear may notshift.

(1)

(2)

3-15


80J23-03E

Canceling the manual modeTo cancel the manual mode, shift the gear-shift lever from “M” to “D”.

Temporary manual modePull the shift paddle (if equipped) towardyou when driving with the gearshift lever inthe “D” position. The information displayshows the manual mode indicator (1) andthe current gear position (2).

80J2073

(1) Manual mode indicator(2) Gear position

The temporary manual mode will be can-celed automatically in the following situa-tions.• When you press and hold the accelera-

tor pedal for a certain period of time with-out shifting gears.

• When driving speed becomes slow.

If You Cannot Shift CVT Gearshift LeverOut of “P” (PARK)

80J2040

Vehicles with a CVT have an electricallyoperated park-lock feature. If the vehicle’sbattery is discharged, or there is someother electrical failure, the CVT cannot beshifted out of Park in the normal way. Jumpstarting may correct the condition. If not,follow the procedure described below. Thisprocedure will permit changing the tran-saxle out of Park.

1) Be sure the parking brake is firmlyapplied.

2) If the engine is running, stop theengine.

3) Make sure the key is in the “ON” or“ACC” position.

4) Remove the cover (1) over the button.5) With pushing the release button by the

key or the flat end rod, shift the gear-shift lever to the desired position.

This procedure is for emergency use only.If repeated use of this procedure is neces-sary, or the procedure does not work asdescribed, take the vehicle to your dealerfor repair.

(1) (2)EXAMPLE

(1)

3-16


80J23-03E

Using the 2WD/i-AWD (intelligent All Wheel Drive) Switch (if equipped)

80J009

This i-AWD system enables you to selectthe driving mode according to the drivingconditions by operating the 2WD/i-AWDswitch. With this feature, you can select 3mode positions, “2WD”, “i-AWD AUTO”and “i-AWD LOCK” by operating the 2WD/i-AWD switch even when the vehicle ismoving, provided the front wheels are inthe straight ahead position.

Description of 3 Mode 4 x 4 System Positions2WDIn this position, engine power is supplied tothe front axle only. Use this position fornormal driving (on dry, hard surfaces).

i-AWD AUTOIn this position, engine power is supplied tothe front and rear axles at normal speed,providing greater traction than 2-wheeldrive. Use this position for driving on pavedroads or on slippery roads (icy, snow-cov-ered, muddy, etc.).

In the AUTO mode, the i-AWD controllerjudges the driving conditions using signalsfrom sensors.When slipping of the front wheels isdetected, the electronically controlled cou-pling supplies optimum driving force to therear wheels. This function improves drivingstability and running through performanceon rough roads and stabilizes driving per-formance even on a snow covered up-hillroad or the like.Also, during normal driving on pavedroads, torque distribution to the rearwheels is reduced to achieve the nearlyfront wheel drive condition, thereby fuelconsumption is improved.

i-AWD LOCKIn this position, engine power is supplied tothe front and rear axles at reduced speed.Use this position when it is hard to start offin the “i-AWD AUTO” mode such as inmud, sand or on snow.

NOTE:• Avoid operating your vehicle in the “i-

AWD LOCK” on wet pavement as muchas possible. Operating your vehicle inthe “i-AWD LOCK” on wet pavement

may cause severe damage to the drivetrain.

• As the vehicle speed increases, the “i-AWD LOCK” mode is automatically can-celed and the “i-AWD AUTO” mode isselected.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the“OFF” position, the “i-AWD LOCK” modeis canceled.

2WD/i-AWD Switch OperationOperate the 2WD/i-AWD switch accordingto the appropriate procedure describedbelow:

How to turn on 2WD/i-AWD switch2WD/i-AWD switch will activate when theignition switch is turned on.

From 2WD to i-AWD AUTOTurn the 2WD/i-AWD switch to the neutralposition, and the “i-AWD AUTO” indicatorwill come on.

79J040

3-17


80J23-03E

From i-AWD AUTO to i-AWD LOCKPush the “i-AWD LOCK” switch for a fewseconds until the “i-AWD LOCK” indicatorwill come on.

79J100

From i-AWD LOCK to i-AWD AUTOPush the “i-AWD LOCK” switch, and the “i-AWD AUTO” indicator will come on.

From i-AWD AUTO or LOCK to 2WDPush the “2WD” switch, and the “i-AWDAUTO” or “i-AWD LOCK” indicator will turnoff.

NOTE:• The 2WD/i-AWD switch can be operated

when the vehicle is either stopped ormoving.

• Make sure that the front wheels are inthe straight ahead position when operat-ing the 2WD/i-AWD switch.

• While making turns or accelerating anddecelerating, operating the 2WD/i-AWDswitch or turning off the key switch in the“i-AWD AUTO” or “i-AWD LOCK” modemay cause a shock, but this is not a sys-tem malfunction.

• While driving in the “i-AWD LOCK”mode, as the vehicle speed increases,the driving mode changes to the “i-AWDAUTO” mode automatically. Even whenthe vehicle speed reduces, on the otherhand, the driving mode does not returnto the “i-AWD LOCK” mode automati-cally. You should press the “i-AWDLOCK” switch according to the drivingconditions.

• Any forcible operation while driving off-road in the sand or water or when awheel has run off the road, the differenceof the revolution between front wheelsand rear wheels increases (wheels runidle). If this state continues, the oil tem-perature of the driving system partsrises. In such case, the “i-AWD AUTO” indica-tor light blinks and the driving modechanges to the 2WD mode to protect thedriving system parts. When you operate your vehicle in the i-AWD mode continuously, park the vehi-cle at a safe place and run the engineidle. After some time, the “i-AWD AUTO”indicator light turns on again and thedriving mode returns to the “i-AWDAUTO” mode.

CAUTION• Never use the “i-AWD LOCK” mode

when driving on dry paved roads.Avoid using the “i-AWD LOCK”mode when driving on wet pavedroads as much as possible. Use ofthe “i-AWD LOCK” mode in aboveconditions will apply excessiveforce to the driving system andmay cause a critical failure. Also,the tires may wear faster and fuelconsumption may be affectedadversely.

• Note that i-AWD vehicles are notall-around vehicles. Be sure toobserve following instructionswhen driving your vehicle.– Do not drive through water like

crossing a river.– Do not drive continuously where

front wheels tend to race inplaces such as sand and mud.

– When any wheel is in the air forsuch reason as running off theroad, do not race it needlessly.

• If the “i-AWD AUTO” and the “i-AWD LOCK” indicator lights stayon and come on simultaneouslywhen driving, there may be some-thing wrong the i-AWD system.Have the system inspected by anauthorized SUZUKI dealer.

3-18


80J23-03E

Cruise Control (if equipped)

79JM005

The cruise control system allows you tomaintain a steady speed without keepingyour foot on the accelerator pedal. Thecontrols for operating the cruise controlsystem are on the steering wheel.

You can use the cruise control system withthe following conditions:• For manual transaxle vehicle, the gear

position is in 4th, 5th or 6th.• For CVT vehicle, the gearshift lever is in

“D” position, or the gear position is in3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th in the manual mode.

• The vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40km/h) or higher.

79JM006

(1) “CRUISE” switch(2) “CANCEL” switch(3) “SET/COAST” switch(4) “RES/ACC” switch

CAUTIONUnevenly worn tires can cause prob-lems in the operation of the 2WD/i-AWD switch. Be sure to rotate thetires according to the maintenanceschedule. Refer to “Tires” and “Main-tenance Schedule” in the “INSPEC-TION AND MAINTENANCE” sectionfor proper tire rotation procedures.

WARNINGTo help avoid loss of vehicle control,do not use the cruise control systemwhen driving in heavy traffic, on slip-pery or winding roads, or on steepdowngrades.

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

3-19


80J23-03E

To Set Cruising Speed1) Turn on the cruise control system by

pushing the “CRUISE” switch (1). Whenthe “CRUISE” indicator light comes on,you can set cruising speed.

2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desiredspeed.

3) Push the “SET/COAST” switch (3) andturn on the “SET” indicator light. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal andthe set speed will be maintained.

“CRUISE” indicator light

52D113

When you push the “CRUISE” switch, thesystem is on and a “CRUISE” indicatorlight on the instrument cluster will be on.

“SET” indicator light

65D474

When the vehicle’s speed is controlled bythe cruise control system, a “SET” indica-tor light on the instrument cluster will beon.

To Change Speed TemporarilyWhen the cruising speed is maintained,you can temporarily accelerate or deceler-ate.

To accelerate, depress the acceleratorpedal. When you take your foot off thepedal, your vehicle will return to the setspeed.

To decelerate, depress the brake pedal.The set speed will be canceled and “SET”indicator light will go off.To resume the previously set speed, pushthe “RES/ACC” switch (4) and turn on the“SET” indicator light again when vehiclespeed is above 25 mph (40 km/h). Thevehicle will accelerate to and maintain thepreviously set speed.

NOTE:For CVT vehicle, when the cruising speedis maintained, you cannot decelerate byusing the engine brake if you downshiftfrom higher gear to 3rd in the manualmode.To decelerate while the cruise control is on,depress the brake pedal or push the “SET/COAST” switch (3).

WARNINGIf the cruising speed is set by acci-dent, you cannot decelerate or couldloose control of the vehicle. Thiscould lead to an accident, resulting insevere injury or death.

Turn off the cruise control systemand make sure the “CRUISE” indica-tor light is off when the system is notin use.

3-20


80J23-03E

To Change Cruising Speed

Using the accelerator pedalTo reset at a faster cruising speed, acceler-ate to the desired speed using the acceler-ator pedal and push the “SET/COAST”switch (3). The new speed will be main-tained.

Using the brake pedalTo reset at a slower cruising speed, decel-erate to the desired speed using the brakepedal and push the “SET/COAST” switch(3). The new speed will be maintained.

NOTE:When the brake pedal is depressed, the“SET” indicator light goes off until reset thecruising speed.

Using the cruise control switchTo reset at a faster cruising speed, pressrepeatedly or hold in the “RES/ACC”switch (4). Vehicle speed will steadilyincrease. When you release the switch, thenew speed will be maintained.

To reset at a slower cruising speed, pressrepeatedly or hold in the “SET/COAST”switch (3) until the vehicle has slowed tothe desired speed, then release the switch.The new speed will be maintained.

NOTE:You can adjust the set speed by approxi-mately 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) by pushing acruise control switch quickly.

Cancellation of the Cruise ControlThe “SET” indicator light will go off and thecruise control will be canceled temporarilywith following procedures:

• Push the “CANCEL” switch (2).• Depress the brake pedal.• For manual transaxle, depress the clutch

pedal. • For CVT, downshift from 3rd to 2nd in the

manual mode.• The vehicle speed falls more than about

20 percent from the set speed.• Any time the vehicle speed falls below

25 mph (40 km/h).• When the vehicle skids and ESP® (if

equipped) is activated.

To resume the previously set speed, pushthe “RES/ACC” switch (4) and turn on the“SET” indicator light. Besides, the vehiclespeed has to be above 25 mph (40 km/h)when the vehicle is not in the above condi-tions.

To turn off the cruise control system, pushthe “CRUISE” switch (1) and make surethe “CRUISE” indicator light is off.Also, if the malfunction indicator light in theinstrument cluster comes on or blinks, thecruise control system will be turned off.

NOTE:If you turn off the cruise control system, thepreviously set speed in the memory iscleared. Reset your cruising speed again.

Braking

60G165

The distance needed to bring any vehicleto a halt increases with the speed of thevehicle. The braking distance needed, forexample, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will beapproximately 4 times greater than thebraking distance needed at 30 km/h (19mph). Start to brake the vehicle when thereis plenty of distance between your vehicleand the stopping point, and slow downgradually.

3-21


80J23-03E

Power-Assisted BrakesYour vehicle has power-assisted brakes. Ifpower assistance is lost due to a stalledengine or other failures, the system is stillfully operational on reserve power and youcan bring the vehicle to a complete stop bypressing the brake pedal once and holdingit down. The reserve power is partly usedup when you depress the brake pedal andreduces each time the pedal is pressed.Apply smooth and even pressure to thepedal. Do not pump the pedal.

Brake Assist SystemWhen you slam the brakes on, the brakeassist system judges as an emergencystop and provides more powerful brakingfor a driver who cannot hold down thebrake pedal firmly.

NOTE:If you quickly and forcefully depress thebrakes, you may hear a clicking sound inthe brake pedal. This is normal and indi-cates that the brake assist system is acti-vated properly.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) (if equipped)ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-tronically controlling braking pressure. Itwill also help you maintain steering controlwhen braking on slippery surfaces or whenbraking hard.

The ABS works automatically, so you donot need any special braking technique.Just push the brake pedal down withoutpumping. The ABS will operate whenever itsenses that the wheels are locking up.

You may feel the brake pedal pulsate whilethe ABS is operating.

NOTE:The ABS will not work if vehicle speed isunder about 6 km/h (4mph).

WARNINGIf water gets into the brake drums,brake performance may become poorand unpredictable.After driving through water or wash-ing the underside of the vehicle, testthe brakes while driving at a slowspeed to see if they have maintainedtheir normal effectiveness. If thebrakes are less effective than normal,dry them by repeatedly applying thebrakes while driving slowly until thebrakes have regained their normaleffectiveness.

WARNINGEven without reserve power in thebrake system, you can still stop thevehicle by pressing the brake pedalharder than normally required. How-ever, the stopping distance may belonger.

3-22


80J23-03E

65D451

(1) ABS warning light Type 1(2) ABS warning light Type 2(3) Brake system warning light

WARNING• On some types of loose surfaces

(such as gravel, snow-coveredroads, etc.), the stopping distancerequired for an ABS-equipped vehi-cle may be slightly greater than fora comparable vehicle with a con-ventional brake system. With aconventional brake system, skid-ding tires are able to “plow” thegravel or snow layer, shorteningthe stopping distance. ABS mini-mizes this resistance effect. Allowfor extra stopping distance whendriving on loose surfaces.

• On regular paved roads, some driv-ers may be able to obtain slightlyshorter stopping distances withconventional brake systems thanwith ABS.

• In both of the above conditions,ABS will still offer the advantage ofhelping you maintain directionalcontrol. However, remember thatABS will not compensate for badroad or weather conditions or poordriver judgment. Use good judg-ment and do not drive faster thanconditions will safely allow.

(1) (2)

(3)

WARNINGIf the ABS warning light ((1) or (2)) onthe instrument panel comes on andstays on while driving, there may be aproblem with the ABS system.If this happens:1) Pull off the road and stop care-

fully.2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK”

and then start the engine again.If the warning light comes on brieflythen turns off, the system is normal.If the warning light still stays on,have the system inspected by yourSUZUKI dealer immediately. If theABS system becomes inoperative,the brake system will function as anordinary brake system that has noABS.

3-23


80J23-03E

How the ABS WorksA computer continuously monitors wheelspeed. The computer compares thechanges in wheel speed when braking. Ifthe wheels slow suddenly, indicating askidding situation, the computer willchange braking pressure several timeseach second to prevent the wheels fromlocking. When you start your vehicle orwhen you accelerate after a hard stop, youmay hear a momentary motor or clickingnoise as the system resets or checks itself.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) (if equipped)ESP® is a registered trademark of DaimlerAG.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)helps to control the vehicle during corner-ing if front wheels or rear wheels skid. Italso assists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose or slipperyroad surfaces. It does this by regulating theengine’s output, and by selectively apply-ing the brakes. In addition, ESP® helps toavoid skidding by controlling braking pres-sure.

WARNINGIf the ABS warning light ((1) or (2))and the Brake system warning light(3) on the instrument panel simulta-neously stay on or come on whendriving, both anti-lock function andrear brake force control function (pro-portioning valve function) of the ABSsystem may have failed. This couldcause the rear wheels to skid or thevehicle to spin during braking on aslippery road or hard braking on adry paved road. If both warning lightscome on, drive carefully, avoidinghard braking as much as possible,and ask your SUZUKI dealer toinspect the ABS system immediately.

WARNINGThe ABS may not work properly iftires or wheels other than thosespecified in the owner’s manual areused. This is because the ABS worksby comparing changes in wheelspeed. When replacing tires orwheels, use only the size and typespecified in this owner’s manual.

WARNINGThe ESP® cannot enhance the vehi-cle’s driving stability in all situationsand does not control your vehicle’sentire braking system. The ESP® can-not prevent accidents, includingthose resulting from excessive speedin turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safeand attentive driver can prevent acci-dents. The capabilities of an ESP®-equipped vehicle must never be usedas a substitute for careful driving.

3-24


80J23-03E

The ESP® has the following three systems:

Stability Control SystemThe vehicle stability control system helpsprovide integrated control of systems suchas anti-lock brakes, traction control, enginecontrol, etc. This system automaticallycontrols the brakes and engine to help pre-vent the vehicle from skidding when cor-nering on a slippery road surface or whenturning the steering wheel abruptly.

Traction Control SystemThe traction control system automaticallyhelps prevent the spinning of wheels whenthe vehicle is started or accelerated onslippery road surfaces. The system oper-ates only if it senses that some of thewheels are spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the systemoperates the front or rear brakes andreduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

NOTE:You may hear a clicking sound in theengine compartment for a few secondswhen you start the engine or just after thevehicle begins to move. This means thatthe above systems are in the self-checkmode. This sound does not indicate a mal-function.

Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-tronically controlling braking pressure. Itwill also help you maintain steering controlwhen braking on slippery surfaces or whenbraking hard. The ABS works automati-cally, so you do not have to use any specialbraking technique. Just push the brakepedal down without pumping. The ABS willoperate whenever it senses that wheelsare locking up. You may feel the brakepedal pulsate while the ABS is operating.(For more information on ABS, see “Brak-ing” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE”section.)

NOTE:If the ABS system is activated, you mayhear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsatingin the brake pedal. This is normal and indi-cates that the brake fluid pressure is beingcontrolled properly.

WARNING• The ESP® may not work properly if

tires or wheels other than thosespecified in the Owner’s Manual areused. When replacing tires orwheels, use only the size and typespecified in this Owner’s Manual.

• The ESP® may not work properly iftires are not inflated to the recom-mended tire inflation pressure.

• The ESP® may not work properly iftires are fitted with tire chains.

• The ESP® may not work properly ifthe tires are excessively worn. Besure to replace tires when the treadwear indicators in the groovesappear on the tread surface.

• The ESP® is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

WARNING• The ESP® may not work properly if

engine related parts such as themuffler are not equivalent to stan-dard equipment or are extremelydeteriorated.

• Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-pension since the ESP® may notoperate correctly.

3-25


80J23-03E

The ESP® indicator lights are describedbelow:

SLIP Indicator Light

52KM133

When one of the ESP® systems other thanABS is activated, the SLIP indicator light inthe instrument cluster blinks 5 times persecond.

NOTE:When the SLIP indicator light comes onand stays on while driving, indicating amalfunction of the ESP® systems (otherthan ABS), the brake system will functionas an ordinary ABS with no additionalESP® functions.

NOTE:When you disconnect and re-connect thebattery, ESP® system functions other thanABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-tor light will blink 1 time per second. In thiscase, use the following procedure to re-activate the ESP® systems:1) Drive your vehicle straight ahead with-

out tire slippage at a speed until the slipindicator is turned off. (Drive straight forapproximately 35 km/h (22 mph) ormore and 10 seconds or more.)

2) The slip indicator light will go out andthe ESP® systems (other than ABS) willbe re-activated.

It may take more than few seconds beforethe slip indicator light goes out dependingon the road surface condition.

“ESP” Warning Light

66J031

When the ESP® systems (other than ABS)have a system malfunction, the “ESP”warning light in the instrument clustercomes on.

NOTE:When the “ESP” warning light comes on,or stays on while driving, indicating a mal-function of the ESP® systems (other thanABS), the brake system will function as anordinary ABS that has no additional ESP®

functions.

“ESP OFF” Indicator Light

66J032

You should turn the ESP® on during yourordinary driving, so that you have the ben-efits of all of the ESP® systems.

It may be required to turn the ESP® sys-tems (other than ABS) off if your vehicle isstuck in sand, mud, or snow, where wheelspin is necessary.

CAUTIONIf the SLIP indicator light comes onand stays on while driving, there maybe a malfunction of the ESP® sys-tems (other than ABS). You shouldhave the systems inspected by anauthorized SUZUKI dealer.

CAUTIONIf the “ESP” warning light comes on,or stays on while driving, there maybe a malfunction of the ESP® sys-tems (other than ABS). You shouldhave the systems inspected by anauthorized SUZUKI dealer.

3-26


80J23-03E

“ESP OFF” switch

62J142

When the “ESP OFF” switch located at thecenter console is pushed and held to turnoff the ESP® systems (other than ABS),the “ESP OFF” indicator light in the instru-ment cluster comes on.When you have turned the ESP® systems(other than ABS) off, make sure to turnthem back on before resuming ordinarydriving.When you push the “ESP OFF” switchagain, the “ESP OFF” indicator light will goout and all of the ESP® systems will beactivated.

ABS Warning Light / Brake System Warning LightSee “Braking” in the “OPERATING YOURVEHICLE” section.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)The tire pressure monitoring system isdesigned to alert you when one or more ofthe tires on your vehicle is significantlyunder-inflated. A Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) sensor containing aunique identification code is mounted oneach wheel. The TPMS sensors transmittire pressure signals to a central receiverwhich relays the information to a tire pres-sure monitoring system controller. Whenthe inflation pressure of one or more tiresindicates significant under-inflation, the lowtire pressure warning light shown belowcomes on.

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

52D305

WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehi-cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-ard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pres-sure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to theproper pressure.

(Continued)

3-27


80J23-03E

WARNING(Continued)Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-ciency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumi-nation of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

WARNINGThe tire pressure monitoring systemis not a substitute for regular tirepressure inspections. Check tireinflation pressures monthly whencold and set to the recommendedinflation pressure as specified on thevehicle’s tire information placard andin the owner’s manual. Refer to“Tires” in the “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section.

WARNINGIf the low tire pressure warning lightdoes not come on when the ignitionis turned to the “ON” position, orcomes on and blinks while drivingthere may be a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system. Haveyour vehicle inspected by an autho-rized SUZUKI dealer. Even if the lightturns off after blinking, indicatingthat the monitoring system hasrecovered, make sure to have anauthorized SUZUKI dealer check thesystem.

WARNINGThe load rating of your tires isreduced at lower inflation pressures.If your tires become even moderatelyunder-inflated, the vehicle load mayexceed the load rating of the tires,which can lead to tire failure. The lowtire pressure warning light will notalert you of this condition. The warn-ing light will only come on when oneor more of your tires become signifi-cantly under-inflated. Check andadjust your tire inflation pressure atleast once a month. Refer to “Tires”in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-NANCE” section.

WARNINGIf the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on and stays on, reduce yourspeed and avoid abrupt steering andbraking. Stop in a safe place as soonas possible and check your tires.• If you have a flat tire, replace it with

the spare tire. Refer to “JackingInstructions” in the “EMERGENCYSERVICE” section. Refer to“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels”for instructions on how to restorenormal operation of the tire pres-sure monitoring system after youhave had a flat tire.

• If one or more of your tires isunder-inflated adjust the inflationpressure in all of your tires to therecommended inflation pressure assoon as possible.

Be aware that driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire can causethe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure, and may affect steeringcontrol and brake effectiveness. Thiscould lead to an accident, resulting insevere injury or death.

3-28


80J23-03E

The low tire pressure warning light cancome on due to normal causes such asnatural air leaks and pressure changescaused by changes in temperature oratmospheric pressure. Adjusting the airpressure in the tires to the pressure shownon the tire information placard shouldcause the low tire pressure warning light toturn off.

If the light turns on again shortly afteradjusting the pressure in your tires, youmay have a flat tire. If you have a flat tire,replace it with the spare tire. Refer to“Jacking Instructions” in the “EMER-GENCY SERVICE” section. Refer to“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels” forinstructions on how to restore normal oper-ation of the tire pressure monitoring sys-tem after you have had a flat tire.

NOTE:• When the tire inflation pressure is

adjusted in high altitude areas, the lowtire pressure light may not turn off evenafter tire inflation pressure adjustment.In this case, adjust the inflation pressureto a slightly higher pressure than isshown on the tire information placard.

• The low tire pressure warning light mayturn off temporarily after coming on. Thiscould be due to surface temperatureincreases after long distance driving ortraveling to a high temperature area.Even if the tire pressure warning light

turns off after coming on, make sure tocheck the inflation pressure of all tires.

• To reduce the chance that the low tirepressure warning light will come on dueto normal changes in temperature andatmospheric pressure, it is important tocheck and adjust the tire pressureswhen the tires are cold. Tires thatappear to be at the specified pressurewhen checked after driving, when thetires are warm, could have pressurebelow the specification when the tirescool down. Also, tires that are inflated tothe specified pressure in a warm garagemay have pressure below the specifica-tion when the vehicle is driven outside invery cold temperature. If you adjust thetire pressure in a garage that is warmerthan the outside temperature, youshould add 1 psi to the recommendedcold tire inflation pressure for every 10°Fdifference between garage temperatureand outside temperature.

For tire inflation pressure information, referto “Tire Inflation Pressure” in the “INSPEC-TION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

TPMS Malfunction Indicator

WARNINGYour vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is not oper-ating properly.

WARNINGThe TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

3-29


80J23-03E

When you turn off the engine, however, themalfunction indicator resets. It takes aboutten minutes after restarting the engine forthe malfunction to be detected again andfor the light to start flashing.

TPMS LimitationsThe tire pressure monitoring system maynot function properly under certain circum-stances. In the following situations, the lowtire pressure warning light may come onand remain on or may blink.• When you replace a flat tire with the

spare tire.• When you include the spare tire during a

tire rotation.• When the TPMS sensor is damaged dur-

ing a tire replacement or liquid sealantsare used to repair a flat tire.

• When the TPMS sensor’s electronic sig-nal is disturbed in one of the followingways:– Electric devices or facilities using simi-

lar radio wave frequencies are nearby.– A lot of snow or ice covers the vehicle,

in particular, around the wheels orwheel housings.

– Snow tires or tire chains are used.• When you use non-genuine SUZUKI

wheels or tires.

Replacing Tires and/or WheelsIf you get a flat tire, Suzuki recommendsthat you have an authorized SUZUKIdealer mount a new tire on the wheel thathad the flat tire, and reinstall this tire on thevehicle in place of the spare. The TPMS isalready set up to recognize the ID code ofthe original wheel, and normal TPMS oper-ation will be restored.

If you need to replace original wheels onyour vehicle, your dealer must make surethat TPMS sensors are installed in the newwheels and must set up the TPMS to rec-ognize the new sensors.

NOTE:A TPMS sensor is not installed in the sparetire. You should use the spare tire only inan emergency situation, and shouldreplace the spare tire as soon as possibleto restore normal TPMS operation.

WARNINGWhen the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pres-sure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replace-ment or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltaleafter replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

CAUTION• The tire pressure sensors can be

damaged by the installation orremoval of tires. When tires mustbe repaired or replaced, we highlyrecommend that you have themrepaired or replaced by an autho-rized SUZUKI dealer.

• Do not use liquid sealants for a flattire as air pressure sensors can bedamaged.

• If the low tire pressure warninglight comes on frequently, theremay be something wrong with oneof the tires or with the monitoringsystem. Have your vehicleinspected by an authorized SUZUKIdealer.

3-30


80J23-03E

For Vehicles Sold in U.S.A.This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1) This device may not cause harmful

interference.2) This device must accept any interfer-



Traveling to CANADAPlease note that service for the tire pres-sure monitoring system may not be avail-able in CANADA should there be anyproblems or malfunctions in the system.

WARNINGOnly use tires and wheels recom-mended by SUZUKI as standard oroptional equipment for your vehicle.Use of tires or wheels not recom-mended by SUZUKI can result inTPMS failure. Refer to “Tires” in the“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”section for additional information.

3-31


80J23-03E

MEMO

DRIVING TIPS

4

80J23-03E

60G409

DRIVING TIPSBreak-In ................................................................................ 4-1Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 4-1Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 4-2Highway Driving .................................................................. 4-3Driving on Hills .................................................................... 4-3Driving on Slippery Roads ................................................. 4-4

4-1

DRIVING TIPS

80J23-03E

52D078S

Break-In Catalytic Converter

68KM085

The purpose of the catalytic converter is tominimize the amount of harmful pollutantsin your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leadedfuel in vehicles equipped with catalyticconverters is prohibited by federal law,because lead deactivates the pollutant-reducing components of the catalyst sys-tem.

The converter is designed to last the life ofthe vehicle under normal usage and whenunleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-nance is required on the converter. How-ever, it is very important to keep the engineproperly tuned. Engine misfiring, whichcan result from an improperly tunedengine, may cause overheating of the cat-alyst. This may result in permanent heatdamage to the catalyst and other vehiclecomponents.

WARNING• Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times.

Even though air bags are equippedat the front seating positions, thedriver and all passengers shouldbe properly restrained at all times,using the seat belts provided. Referto the “Seat Belts and ChildRestraint Systems” section forinstructions on proper use of theseat belts.

• Never drive while under the influ-ence of alcohol or other drugs.Alcohol and drugs can seriouslyimpair your ability to drive safely,greatly increasing the risk of injuryto yourself and others. You shouldalso avoid driving when you aretired, sick, irritated or under stress.

CAUTIONThe future performance and reliabil-ity of the engine depends on the careand restraint exercised during itsearly life. It is especially important toobserve the following precautionsduring the initial 960 km (600 miles)of vehicle operation.• After starting, do not race the

engine. Warm it up gradually.• Avoid prolonged vehicle operation

at a constant speed. Moving partswill break in better if you vary yourspeed.

• Start off from a stop slowly. Avoidfull throttle starts.

• Avoid hard stopping, especiallyduring the first 320 km (200 miles)of driving.

• Do not drive slowly with the tran-saxle in a high gear.

• Drive the vehicle at moderateengine speeds.

Instrument Panel: 3, 8

4-2

DRIVING TIPS

80J23-03E

54G584S

Improving Fuel EconomyThe following instructions will help youimprove fuel economy.

Avoid excessive idlingIf you are to wait for more than a minutewhile you are parked, stop the engine andstart it again later. When warming up acold engine, allow the engine to idle untilthe temperature gauge pointer comes upto the “C” position. In this position, theengine is sufficiently warm for starting off.

Avoid “jackrabbit” startsFast starts away from lights or stop signswill consume fuel unnecessarily andshorten engine life. Start off slowly.

Avoid unnecessary stopsAvoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speedwhenever possible. Slowing down and thenaccelerating again uses more fuel.

Keep a steady cruising speedKeep as constant a speed as road and traf-fic conditions will permit.

CAUTIONTo minimize the possibility of catalystor other vehicle damage:• Maintain the engine in the proper

operating condition.• In the event of an engine malfunc-

tion, particularly one involvingengine misfire or other apparentloss of performance, have the vehi-cle serviced promptly.

• Do not shut off the engine or inter-rupt the ignition when the transaxleis in gear and the vehicle is inmotion.

• Do not try to start the engine bypushing or towing the vehicle orcoasting down a hill.

• Do not idle the engine with anyspark plug wires disconnected orremoved, such as during diagnos-tic testing.

• Do not idle the vehicle for pro-longed periods if idling seemsrough or there are other malfunc-tions.

• Do not allow the fuel tank to getnear the empty level.

WARNINGBe careful where you park and drive;the catalytic converter and otherexhaust components can get veryhot. As with any vehicle, do not parkor operate this vehicle in areas wherecombustible materials such as drygrass or leaves can come in contactwith a hot exhaust system.

Instrument Cluster: 8

4-3

DRIVING TIPS

80J23-03E

60A183S

Keep the air cleaner cleanIf the air cleaner is clogged with dust, therewill be greater intake resistance, resultingin decreased power output and increasedfuel consumption.

Keep weight to a minimumThe heavier the load, the more fuel thevehicle consumes. Take out any luggageor cargo when it is not necessary.

Keep tire pressure correctUnderinflation of the tires can waste fueldue to increased running resistance of thetires. Keep your tires inflated to the correctpressure shown on the label located belowthe driver’s side door latch striker.

Highway DrivingWhen driving at highway speeds, payattention to the following:• Stopping distance progressively

increases with vehicle speed. Apply thebrakes far enough ahead of the stoppingpoint to allow for the extra stopping dis-tance.

• On rainy days, “Hydroplaning” can occur.“Hydroplaning” is the loss of direct con-tact between the road surface and thevehicle’s tires due to a water film formingbetween them. Steering or braking thevehicle while “Hydroplaning” can be verydifficult, and loss of control can occur.Keep speed down when the road surfaceis wet.

• At high speeds, the vehicle may beaffected by side winds. Therefore,reduce speed and be prepared for unex-pected buffeting, which can occur at theexits of tunnels, when passing by a cut ofa hill, or when being overtaken by largevehicles, etc.

Driving on Hills

80J2066

• When climbing steep hills, the car maybegin to slow down and show a lack ofpower. If this happens, you should shiftto a lower gear so that the engine willagain be operating in its normal powerrange. Shift rapidly to prevent the carfrom losing momentum.

• When driving down a hill, the engineshould be used for braking by shifting tonext lower gear. (Do this with EITHER aCVT or manual transaxle.)

EXAMPLE

Warning and Indicator Lights: 8

4-4

DRIVING TIPS

80J23-03E

Driving on Slippery Roads

60G089S

Under wet road conditions you shoulddrive at a lower speed than on dry roadsdue to possible slippage of tires duringbraking. When driving on icy, snow-cov-ered, or muddy roads, reduce your speedand avoid sudden acceleration, abruptbraking, or sharp steering movements.

intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) ModelsYour i-AWD provides greater traction onslippery roads than 2-wheel drive models.However, your i-AWD will not have asmuch traction in deep snow, mud or sandas multipurpose 4WD vehicles. You shouldnot attempt to drive your i-AWD in deepsnow, mud or sand. i-AWD models are notsport/utility vehicles, and are not designedfor off-road use.

If Your Vehicle Gets StuckIf your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud orsand, follow the directions below:1) Shift the transaxle back and forth

between a forward range (or first gearfor manual transaxle) and reverse. Thiswill create a rocking motion which maygive you enough momentum to free thevehicle. Press gently on the acceleratorto keep wheel spinning to a minimumwheel rpm. Remove your foot from theaccelerator while shifting. Do not race the engine. Excessivewheel spin will cause the tires to digdeeper, making it more difficult to freethe vehicle.

2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a fewminutes of rocking, get another vehicleto pull your vehicle out.

WARNINGTry not to hold the brake pedal downtoo long or too often while goingdown a steep or long hill. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, result-ing in reduced braking efficiency.Failure to take this precaution couldresult in loss of vehicle control.

CAUTIONWhen descending a down hill,NEVER turn the ignition key to the“OFF” position. Emission controlsystem and CVT (if equipped) dam-age may result.

WARNINGDo not allow anyone to stand near thevehicle when you are rocking it, anddo not spin the wheels faster than anindicated 40 km/h (25 mph) on thespeedometer. Personal injury and/orvehicle damage may result from spin-ning the wheels too fast.


4-5

DRIVING TIPS

80J23-03E

Tire ChainsTire chains should only be used if they areneeded to increase traction or are requiredby law. Make sure that the chains you useare small-link chains or cable-type chainsand are the correct size for your vehicle’stires. Also make sure that there is enoughclearance between the fenders and thechains as installed on the tires.

Install the chains on the front tires tightly,according to the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. Retighten the chains afterdriving about 1.0 km (1/2 mile) if neces-sary. With the chains installed, drive slowly.

Do not drive through deep or rushingwaterDriving in deep or rushing water can behazardous. You could lose control of thevehicle and the occupants could drown.Also, your vehicle could be seriously dam-aged. To avoid these risks, observe the fol-lowing instructions and precautions.

• Do not drive through deep or rushingwater. Deep or rushing water, such asfast-moving streams or floodwaters,could carry your vehicle away from yourintended path. The water is too deep if itcovers your wheel hubs, axles orexhaust tailpipe. Know the depth of thewater before you attempt to drivethrough it.

• If water blocks the tailpipe, the enginemay not start or run. If the water is deepenough to get drawn into the engineintake system, the engine will be badlydamaged.

• Submerged brakes will have poor brak-ing performance. Drive slowly and care-fully. Driving slowly will also help avoidwater splashing onto the ignition system,which could cause the engine to stall.

• Even when driving through shallow orstill waters, drive carefully since thewater may be hiding ground hazardssuch as holes, ditches or bumps.

54G638S

CAUTIONDo not continue rocking the vehiclefor more than a few minutes. Pro-longed rocking can cause engineoverheating, transaxle or transfercase damage or tire damage.

CAUTIONIf you hear the chains hitting againstthe vehicle body while driving, stopand tighten them.If your vehicle is equipped with fullwheel caps, remove the wheel capsbefore installing the chains or thewheel caps can be damaged by thechain bands.


4-6

DRIVING TIPS

80J23-03E

WARNINGIn addition to following the drivingtips in this section, it is important toobserve the following precautions.• Make sure your tires are in good

condition and always maintain thespecified tire pressure. Refer to“Tires” in the “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section fordetails.

• Do not use tires other than thosespecified by SUZUKI. Never use dif-ferent sizes or types of tires on thefront and rear wheels. For informa-tion regarding the specified tires,refer to the Tire Information Labellocated on the driver’s side doorpillar.

• Never use oversized tires or specialshocks and springs to raise (jackup) your vehicle. This will changeits handling characteristics. Over-sized tires may also rub against thefender over bumps, causing vehicledamage or tire failure.

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• After driving through water, test the

brakes while driving at a slowspeed to see if they have main-tained their normal effectiveness. Ifthe brakes are less effective thannormal, dry them by repeatedlyapplying the brakes while drivingslowly until the brakes haveregained their normal effective-ness.


4-7

DRIVING TIPS

80J23-03E

MEMO

Warning and Indicator Lights: 8A/T Selector Position Indicator: 8Speedometer/Odometer/Trip meter: 8

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

5

80J23-03E

60G407

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENTHeating and Air Conditioning System ............................... 5-1Radio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-15Audio Systems .................................................................... 5-15Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-43Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-44Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-45Interior Light Switch ........................................................... 5-45Luggage Compartment Light (SX4) ................................... 5-46Trunk Light (SX4 SEDAN) ................................................... 5-46Spot Light ............................................................................ 5-47Accessory Socket (if equipped) ......................................... 5-47Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray (if equipped) ..................... 5-47Assist Grips (if equipped) .................................................. 5-48Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-49Cup Holder and Storage Area (if equipped) ..................... 5-49Front Seat Back Pocket (if equipped) ............................... 5-50Armrest (if equipped) .......................................................... 5-51Shopping Hook (if equipped) ............................................. 5-51Floor Mats (if equipped) ..................................................... 5-51Luggage Compartment Cover (if equipped) ..................... 5-52Luggage Compartment Board (if equipped) ..................... 5-53Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors (if equipped) ............... 5-55Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-56

5-1


80J23-03E

Heating and Air Conditioning SystemThere are three types of heating and airconditioning systems as follows:

• Heating System• Manual Heating and Air Conditioning

System• Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning

System (Climate Control)

Air Outlet

80JM044

1. Windshield defroster outlet2. Side defroster outlet3. Side outlet4. Center outlet5. Floor outlet

EXAMPLE

Parking Brake Lever: 6Pedals: 6

5-2


80J23-03E

Side outlet

63J045

When “Open”, air comes out regardless ofthe air flow selector position.

Heating SystemDescription of Controls

63J193

Temperature selector (1)This is used to select the temperature byturning the selector.

Blower speed selector (2)This is used to turn on the blower and toselect blower speed by turning the selec-tor.

Air flow selector (3)

63J048

This is used to select one of the functionsdescribed below.

Ventilation (a)

79J065

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe center and side air outlets.

(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(a)

(b)

(e)

(d)

(c)

Pedals: 6Gearshift Lever: 10

5-3


80J23-03E

Bi-level (b)

79J066

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and cooler air comes outof the center and side outlets. When thetemperature selector (1) is in the fullyCOLD position or fully HOT position, how-ever, the air from the floor outlets and theair from the center and side outlets will bethe same temperature.

Heat (c)

79J067

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and the side outlets, alsocomes out of the windshield defroster out-lets and also comes slightly out of the sidedefroster outlets.

Heat & defrost (d)

79J068

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets, the windshield defrosteroutlets, the side defroster outlets and theside outlets.

Defrost (e)

79J069

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe windshield defroster outlets, the sidedefroster outlets and the side outlets.

Air intake selector (4)

63J047

This selector is used to select the followingmodes.

Fresh Air (f)When this mode is selected, the indicatorlight will go off and outside air is used.

Recirculated Air (g)When this mode is selected, the indicatorlight will come on, outside air is shut outand inside air is recirculated. This mode issuitable when driving through dusty or pol-luted air such as in a tunnel, or whenattempting to quickly cool down the inte-rior.

“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”are switched alternately each time the airintake selector is pushed.

NOTE:If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for anextended period of time, the air in the vehi-cle can become contaminated. Therefore,you should occasionally select “FRESHAIR”.

(g)(f)

Gearshift Lever: 10Fuel Filler Cap: 5

5-4


80J23-03E

System Operating InstructionsNatural ventilationSelect “VENTILATION” and “FRESH AIR”,the temperature selector to the desiredtemperature position, and the blowerspeed selector to “OFF”. Fresh air will flowthrough the vehicle during driving.

Forced ventilationThe control settings are the same as fornatural ventilation except you set theblower speed selector to a position otherthan “OFF”.

Normal heating (using outside air)Select “HEAT” and “FRESH AIR”, the tem-perature selector to the desired tempera-ture position and the blower speed selectorto the desired blower speed position. Set-ting the blower speed selector to a higherblower speed position increases heatingefficiency.

Quick heating (using recirculated air)The control settings are the same as fornormal heating except you select “RECIR-CULATED AIR”. If you use this heatingmethod for an extended period of time, theair in the vehicle can become contami-nated and the windows can become misty.Therefore, use this method only for quickheating and change to the normal heatingmethod as soon as possible.

Head cooled/Feet warmed heatingSelect “BI-LEVEL” and “FRESH AIR”, thetemperature selector to the desired tem-

perature position, and the blower speedselector to the desired blower speed posi-tion. Unless the temperature selector is inthe fully COLD position or fully HOT posi-tion, the air that comes out of the centerand side outlets will be cooler than the airthat comes out of the floor outlets.

Defrosting/Feet warmed heatingSelect “HEAT & DEFROST” and “FRESHAIR”, the temperature selector to thedesired temperature position, and theblower speed selector to HIGH. When thewindshield has become clear, set theblower speed selector to the desiredblower speed position.

DefrostingSelect “DEFROST” and “FRESH AIR”, thetemperature selector to the desired tem-perature position (higher temperature pro-vides more efficient defrosting), and theblower speed selector to HIGH. When thewindshield has become clear, set theblower speed selector to the desiredblower speed position.

79J070

NOTE:If you need maximum defrosting, adjust thetemperature selector to the HOT end andadjust the side outlets so the air blows onthe side window, in addition to the aboveDefrosting steps.

EXAMPLE

Fuel Filler Cap: 5Folding Rear Seats: 3

5-5


80J23-03E

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning SystemDescription of Controls

80JC042

Temperature selector (1)This is used to select the temperature byturning the selector.

Blower speed selector (2)This is used to turn on the blower and toselect blower speed by turning the selec-tor.


80JC043

This is used to select one of the functionsdescribed below.

Ventilation (a)

79J065


Bi-level (b)

79J066


(1) (2)(5) (3)

(4)

(a)

(b)

(e)

(d)

(c)

Folding Rear Seats: 3

5-6


80J23-03E

Heat (c)

79J067

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and the side outlets, alsocomes out of the windshield defroster out-lets and also comes slightly out of the sidedefroster outlets.

Heat & defrost (d)

79J068


Defrost (e)

79J069


NOTE:When the air flow selector (3) is turnedeither to “Heat & defrost (d)” or “Defrost(e)”, the air conditioning system will comeon and the “FRESH AIR” mode will beselected automatically.


63J047

This selector is used to select the followingmodes.

Fresh Air (f)When this mode is selected, the indicatorlight will go off and outside air is used.

Recirculated Air (g)When this mode is selected, the indicatorlight will come on, outside air is shut outand inside air is recirculated. This mode issuitable when driving through dusty or pol-luted air such as in a tunnel, or whenattempting to quickly cool down the inte-rior.

“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”are switched alternately each time the airintake selector is pushed.


(g)(f)


5-7


80J23-03E

Air conditioning switch (5)To turn on the air conditioning system,push in the “A/C” switch and set the blowerspeed selector to a position other than“OFF”. With this “A/C” switch operation, aindicator light will come on when the airconditioning system is on. To turn off theair conditioning system, push the “A/C”switch again.

During operation of the air conditioner, youmay notice slight changes in enginespeed. These changes are normal, thesystem is designed so that the compressorturns on or off to maintain the desired tem-perature.

Less operation of the compressor resultsin better fuel economy.

System Operating InstructionsNatural ventilationSelect “VENTILATION” and “FRESH AIR”,the temperature selector to the desiredtemperature position, and the blowerspeed selector to “OFF”. Fresh air will flowthrough the vehicle during driving.

Forced ventilationThe control settings are the same as fornatural ventilation except you set theblower speed selector to a position otherthan “OFF”.

Normal heating (using outside air)Select “HEAT” and “FRESH AIR”, the tem-perature selector to the desired tempera-ture position and the blower speed selectorto the desired blower speed position. Set-ting the blower speed selector to a higherblower speed position increases heatingefficiency.

Quick heating (using recirculated air)The control settings are the same as fornormal heating except you select “RECIR-CULATED AIR”. If you use this heatingmethod for an extended period of time, theair in the vehicle can become contami-nated and the windows can become misty.Therefore, use this method only for quickheating and change to the normal heatingmethod as soon as possible.

Head cooled/Feet warmed heatingSelect “BI-LEVEL” and “FRESH AIR”, thetemperature selector to the desired tem-perature position, and the blower speedselector to the desired blower speed posi-tion. Unless the temperature selector is inthe fully COLD position or fully HOT posi-tion, the air that comes out of the centerand side outlets will be cooler than the airthat comes out of the floor outlets.

Normal coolingTurn on the “A/C” switch, set the air flowselector to “VENTILATION”, the tempera-ture selector to the desired temperatureposition and the blower speed selector tothe desired blower speed position. Settingthe blower speed selector to a higherblower speed position increases coolingefficiency.

You can switch the air intake selector toeither “FRESH AIR” or “RECIRCULATEDAIR” as you desire. Choosing “RECIRCU-LATED AIR” increases cooling efficiency.


5-8


80J23-03E

Quick cooling (using recirculated air)The control settings are the same as fornormal cooling except you select “RECIR-CULATED AIR” and the highest blowerspeed.

NOTE:• If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for

an extended period of time, the air in thevehicle can become contaminated.Therefore, you should occasionallyselect “FRESH AIR”.

• If your vehicle has been left in the sunwith the windows closed, it will coolfaster if you open the windows brieflywhile you operate the air conditioner withthe air intake selector at “FRESH AIR”and the blower at high speed.

DehumidifyingTurn on the “A/C” switch, set the air flowselector to a desired air flow selector posi-tion, and select “FRESH AIR”, the temper-ature selector to the desired temperatureposition, and the blower speed selector tothe desired blower speed position.

NOTE:Because the air conditioner dehumidifiesthe air, turning it on will help keep the win-dows clear, even when blowing heated airusing the “DEFROST” or “HEAT &DEFROST” functions.

79J070

NOTE:If you need maximum defrosting:• select “DEFROST” and “FRESH AIR”,• turn on the “A/C” switch,• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,• adjust the temperature selector to the

HOT end, and• adjust the side outlets so the air blows

on the side windows.

MaintenanceIf you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oiland helps protect the internal components.

Your air conditioner is equipped with air fil-ters. Clean or replace them as specified inthe “Maintenance Schedule” in the“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-tion. Have this job done by your SUZUKIdealer as the lower glove box must be low-ered for this job.

NOTE:Your vehicle uses the air conditioningrefrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around1993 for automotive applications. Otherrefrigerants are available, including recy-cled R-12, but only R-134a should be usedin your vehicle.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONUsing the wrong refrigerant maydamage your air conditioning sys-tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix orreplace the R-134a with other refrig-erants.


5-9


80J23-03E

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System (Climate Control)Description of Controls

80J2042

(1) (9) (2)

(7) (3)(5)(4)(6)(8)

(1) Temperature selector(2) Blower speed selector(3) Air intake selector(4) Air flow selector(5) Defrost switch(6) “OFF” switch(7) Air conditioning switch(8) “AUTO” switch(9) Display

Folding Rear Seats: 3Armrest: 3

5-10


80J23-03E

Temperature selector (1)

80J2043

Turn the temperature selector (1) to adjustthe temperature.

Air conditioning switch (7)The air conditioning switch (7) is used toturn on and off the air conditioning system.To turn on the air conditioning system,push in the switch and “A/C ON” willappear on the display. To turn off the airconditioning system, push in the switchagain and “A/C ON” will go off.

Blower speed selector (2)

80JM047

The blower speed selector (2) is used toturn on the blower and to select blowerspeed.

If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, theblower speed will vary automatically as theclimate control system maintains theselected temperature.


80J2044

Push the air intake selector (3) to changebetween the following modes.

If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the airintake will vary automatically as the climatecontrol system maintains the selected tem-perature.

RECIRCULATED AIR (a)When this mode is selected, outside air isshut off and inside air is recirculated. Thismode is suitable when driving through anarea with polluted air such as a tunnel, orwhen attempting to quickly cool down thevehicle.

FRESH AIR (b)When this mode is selected, outside air isintroduced.

(1)

(7)

(2)

(3)

(a)

(b)

Sun Visor: 5Interior Light Switch: 7

5-11


80J23-03E

“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”are selected alternately each time the airintake selector is pushed.



80JM049

Push the air flow selector (4) to changeamong the following functions. The indica-tion of the selected mode appears on thedisplay.

If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the airflow will vary automatically as the climatecontrol system maintains the selected tem-perature.

Ventilation (c)

79J065


Bi-level (d)

79J066


(4)

(c)

(d)

(e)

( f )

Spot Light: 7Assist Grips: 3Coat Hooks:

5-12


80J23-03E

Heat (e)

79J067

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and the side outlets, asmall amount of air comes out of the wind-shield defroster outlets and also comesslightly out of the side defroster outlets.

Heat & defrost (f)

79J068


NOTE:When the heat & defrost (f) is selected, theair conditioning system will come on andthe “FRESH AIR” mode will be selectedautomatically. The “RECIRCULATED AIR”mode cannot be selected. In very coldweather, however, the air conditioning sys-tem will not turn on.

Defrost switch (5)

80JM050

Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on thedefroster.

(5)

Eyeglasses Holder:Engine Hood: 5

5-13


80J23-03E

Defrost

80JM051


NOTE:When the defrost switch (5) is pushed toturn on the defroster, the air conditioningsystem will come on and the “FRESH AIR”mode will be selected automatically. Invery cold weather, however, the air condi-tioning system will not turn on.

System Operating InstructionsAutomatic operation

80JM126

You can let the climate control system workautomatically. To set the system for fully-auto-matic operation, follow the procedure below.

1) Start the engine.2) Push the “AUTO” switch (8).3) Set the desired temperature by turning

the temperature selector (1).

The blower speed, air intake and air floware controlled automatically to maintain theset temperature.

You can use the air conditioning switch (7)to manually turn the air conditioner on or offaccording to your preference. When youturn the air conditioning switch off, the cli-mate control system cannot lower the insidetemperature below outside temperature.

To turn the climate control system off, pushthe “OFF” switch (6).

NOTE:If the “AUTO” on the display blinks, there isa problem in the heating system and/or airconditioning system. You should have thesystem inspected by an authorizedSUZUKI dealer.

NOTE:• To find the temperature at which you are

most comfortable, start with the 72°F(22°C) setting.

• If you turn the temperature selector (1)until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display,the climate control system will operate atthe maximum cooling or heating and theblower will run at full speed.

• To avoid blowing cold air in cold weatheror hot air in hot weather, the system willdelay turning on the blower until warmedor chilled air is available.

• If your vehicle has been left in the sunwith the windows closed, it will coolfaster if you open the windows briefly.

• Even under the automatic operation, youcan set individual selectors to the man-ual mode. The manually selected func-tions are maintained, and the otherfunctions remain under automatic opera-tion.

• To return the blower speed selector (2),air intake selector (3), and air flow selec-tor (4) to automatic operation, push the“AUTO” switch (8).

(7) (6)

(8)(1)

Cup Holder and Storage Area: 3

5-14


80J23-03E

80JM127

Be careful not to cover the interior temper-ature sensor (10) located between thesteering wheel and the climate controlpanel, or the solar sensor (11) located atthe top of the driver’s side dashboard.These sensors are used by the automaticsystem to regulate temperature.

Manual operationYou can manually control the climate con-trol system. Set the selectors to thedesired positions.

79J070

NOTE:If you need maximum defrosting:• push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the

defroster (the air conditioning system willcome on and the “FRESH AIR” mode willbe selected automatically),

• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,• adjust the temperature selector to the

“HI” indication on the display, and• adjust the side outlets so the air blows

on the side windows.

MaintenanceIf you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling.This circulates the refrigerant and oil andhelps protect the internal components.

Your air conditioner is equipped with air fil-ters. Clean or replace them as specified inthe “Maintenance Schedule” in the“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-tion. Have this job done by your SUZUKIdealer as the lower glove box must be low-ered for this job.

NOTE:Your vehicle uses the air conditioningrefrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around1993 for automotive applications. Otherrefrigerants are available, including recy-cled R-12, but only R-134a should be usedin your vehicle.

(11)

(10)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONUsing the wrong refrigerant maydamage your air conditioning sys-tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix orreplace the R-134a with other refrig-erants.

Accessory Socket: 8Frame Hooks: 5, 6

5-15


80J23-03E

Radio AntennaSX4

63J055

The radio antenna on the roof is remov-able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turnit clockwise firmly by hand.

SX4 SEDANThe radio antenna wire is printed insidethe rear window.

Audio SystemsThere are two types of audio system asshown below:

Type 1

80J059

AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the radioantenna:• Remove the antenna before using

an automatic car wash.• Remove the antenna when it is pos-

sible for the antenna to hit some-thing such as a low ceiling in aparking garage or putting a carcover over your car.

• Remove the antenna before put-ting a car cover over your vehicle.

EXAMPLE CAUTION• Do not attach any metal objects to

the rear window glass, or placemetallic film near it. Either of theseconditions may cause poor recep-tion or noise.

• When cleaning the inside of therear window, be careful not toscratch or damage the rear windowantenna. Wipe the rear windowlightly along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.

Frame Hooks: 5, 6

5-16


80J23-03E

Type 2

80J060

AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Precautions• When the inside of the car is very cold

and the player is used soon after switch-ing on the heater, moisture may form onthe disc or the optical parts of the playerand proper playback may not be possi-ble. If moisture forms on the disc, wipe itoff with a soft cloth. If moisture forms onthe optical parts of the player, do not usethe player for about one hour. This willallow the condensation to disappear nor-mally.

• Driving on extremely bumpy roads whichcause severe vibrations may causesound to skip.

• This unit uses a precision mechanism.Even in the event that trouble arises,never open the case, disassemble theunit, or lubricate the rotating parts.Please bring the unit to an authorizedSUZUKI dealer or a Clarion serviceDepartment.

Cautions on Handling

52D274

This unit has been designed specifically forplayback of compact discs bearing themark (A).No other discs can be played.

52D275

To remove the compact disc from its stor-age case, press down on the center of thecase and lift the disc out, holding it care-fully by the edges.

Always handle the compact disc by theedges.Never touch the surface.

(A)

Removing the disc Proper way to hold the compact disc

5-17


80J23-03E

52D347

To remove fingermarks and dust, use asoft cloth, and wipe in a straight line fromthe center of the compact disc to the cir-cumference.

52D277

New discs may have some roughnessaround the edges. The unit may not workor the sound may skip if such discs areused. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. toremove the roughness (C) from edges ofthe disc before insertion inside the unit.

52D348

Never stick labels on the surface of thecompact disc or mark the surface with apencil or pen.

52D349

Do not use any solvents such as commer-cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,or thinner to clean compact discs.

52D350

Do not use compact discs that have largescratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc.Use of such discs will cause damage or

prevent the system from operating prop-erly.

52D351

Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-light or any heat source.

NOTE:• Do not use commercially available CD

protection sheets or discs equipped withstabilizers, etc. These may get caught in the internalmechanism and damage the disc.

• CD-R discs may not be able to playbackin this unit due to the recording condi-tions.

• CD-RW discs cannot playback in thisunit.

(B)(B)(C)

5-18


80J23-03E

Basic Operations

80J061

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

(1) Power on/off knob Volume control knob

(2) Tone/balance/fader control knob(3) Preset button 5(4) Preset button 6

5-19


80J23-03E

Turning power on/offPress the power on/off knob (1).The unit starts in the function mode it wasin when the power was turned off last.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the volume control knob (1).Turning it clockwise increases the volume;turning it counterclockwise decreases thevolume.

NOTE:While driving, adjust the volume to anextent that sound and/or noise comingfrom outside the car can be heard.

Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader1) Press the tone/balance/fader control

knob (2). Each time it is pressed, sound adjust-ment is changed as follows:

66J224

2) Turn the tone/balance/fader controlknob (2) to adjust the sound.

Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con-trol)The Automatic Volume Control (AVC) func-tion automatically adjusts (increases/decreases) the sound volume in accor-dance with vehicle speed. The AVC controlis provided with three selectable levels(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volumeadjustment increases together with theLEVEL number, 1) Press the tone/balance/fader control

knob (2) until the AVC adjustment modeis selected.

2) Turn the tone/balance/fader controlknob (2) to select the desired AVCadjustment level. (Initial setting: LEVEL2)

Adjusting the contrast of the display1) Press the tone/balance/fader/control

knob (2) and preset button 5 (3), presetbutton 6 (4) simultaneously.

2) To adjust the contrast of the display,turn the power on/off knob (1).

Cancel the dimmer conditionEach time you press the power on/off knob(1) for two seconds with the lighting switchon, the background brightness of the audiodisplay will switch between normal anddimmed.

Bass adjustment (BASS 0)

Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)

Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)

Fader adjustment (FADER 0)

AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)

Original mode

5-20


80J23-03E

Listening to the Radio

80J062

(1)

(4)

(6) (2)(3)

(5)

(5)

(1)

(4)

(6) (2)(3)



Display

66J097

(1) Band switch button (FM/AM)(2) Seek up button(3) Seek down button(4) Manual tuning knob(5) Preset buttons (1 to 6)(6) Auto store button (AS)/

Scan button (SCAN)

(A) Band(B) Preset channel number(C) Stereo indicator(D) Frequency

(A) (B)

(C)

(D)

5-21


80J23-03E

Selecting the reception bandPress the band switch button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the recep-tion band is switched as follows:

66J098

Seek tuningPress the seek up button (2) or the seekdown button (3).The unit stops searching for a station at afrequency where a broadcast station isavailable.

Manual tuningTurn the manual tuning knob (4).The frequency being received is displayed.

Preset memory1) Select the desired station.2) Select the preset button (5) to which

you want to store the station and pressand hold the button for 2 seconds orlonger.

Auto storePress and hold the auto store button (6) for2 seconds or longer.Six stations in total are automaticallystored to the preset buttons (5) in sequen-tial order, starting from the lower frequen-cies.

NOTE:• When the auto store is performed, the

station previously stored in the memoryat the position is overwritten.

• When there are fewer than 6 stationsthat can be stored even if 2 rounds ofauto store operation are performed, thestations previously stored at the remain-ing preset buttons (5) are not overwrit-ten.

Scan tuning1) Press the scan button (6).

Stations are automatically sought for ina sequential order, starting from a sta-tion being currently received, and scanstops for 5 seconds at a frequencywhere there is a station available.

2) Press the scan button (6) again to stopscanning at the frequency being cur-rently received.

Receiving a stereo broadcast stationIf a stereo broadcast station is received,the stereo indicator will light.

Radio ReceptionRadio reception can be affected by envi-ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radiosignal’s power and distance from the sta-tion. Nearby mountains and buildings mayinterfere or deflect radio reception, causingpoor reception. Poor reception or radiostatic can also be caused by electric cur-rent from overhead wires or high voltagepower lines.

5-22


80J23-03E

Listening to a CD

52D274

• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A)cannot be used.

• Some discs previously recorded in CD-R\CD-RW format may not be used.

52D291

• A CD is inserted with its label facingupward.

• When there is a CD already loaded inthe unit, another CD cannot be loaded atthe same time. Do not use force wheninserting the CD into the CD insertionslot.

• If a blank disc (non-recorded CD-R) isloaded in the unit, the disc will beejected.

(A)

CAUTION• Never insert your finger or hand

into the CD insertion slot. Neverinsert foreign objects.

• Never insert a CD with glue comingout from adhesive tape or a rentalCD label or with a trace indicatingthat adhesive tape or a rental CDlabel has been removed. This maycause the CD not to eject or resultin a malfunction.

5-23


80J23-03E

Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built in CD Player)

80J063

(3)

(6)

(4)

(2)

(1)

(5)

Display

66J100

(1) CD insertion slot(2) CD eject button(3) Disc button (CD/AUX)(4) Track up button/Fast forward button(5) Track down button/Rewind button(6) Repeat button (RPT)

(A) Mode indicator(B) Track number(C) Play time(D) Repeat indicator

(A) (B) (C)

(D)

5-24


80J23-03E

NOTE:About Single CDs (8 cm CDs)• No adapter is required to play a single

CD.• A single CD is inserted from the center

of the CD insertion slot.• Since an ejected single CD is not auto-

matically reloaded, be sure to removethe ejected single CD.

Loading a CDInsert a CD in the CD insertion slot (1).When a CD is loaded, play starts and theCD indicator (A) lights.

Ejecting a CDPress the CD eject button (2).If you left a CD ejected for a period ofabout 15 seconds, it will be automaticallydrawn inside the unit. (Auto reload func-tion)

The backup eject function:This function allows you to eject a CD withthe power turned off by pressing the CDeject button (2).

Listening to a CDWhen a CD is inserted, it is automaticallyplayed back.When a CD is already inside the unit,press the disc button (3) to play back theCD. When a CD is inside the unit, the CDindicator (A) is lit on the display unit.

Selecting a track• Press the track up button (4) to listen to

the next track.• Press the track down button (5) twice to

listen to the previous track. When the track down button (5) ispressed once, the track being currentlyplayed will return to the beginning.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track• Hold in the fast forward button (4) to

advance a track rapidly.• Hold in the rewind button (5) to rewind a

track.

Repeat playPress the repeat button (6).The repeat indicator (D) lights and thetrack currently being played is playedrepeatedly.Press the repeat button (6) again to cancelrepeat play.

CAUTIONIf you forcefully try to push an ejectedCD inside the unit before auto reload-ing, the disc surface might bescratched.

5-25


80J23-03E

Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Changer)

66J064

(2)

(5)

(1)

(8) (6)

(4)

(3)

(7)

Display

66J102

(1) Load button (LOAD)(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)(3) CD insertion slot(4) CD eject button(5) Disc button (CD/AUX)(6) Track up button/Fast forward button(7) Track down button/Rewind button(8) Repeat button (RPT)

(A) Mode indicator(B) Disc number(C) Track number(D) Play time(E) CD indicator(F) Repeat indicator

(A) (C) (D)

(F)

(B) (E)

5-26


80J23-03E

NOTE:About Single CDs (8 cm CDs)• Since the unit is not compatible with a

single CD, do not load it into the unit.• Keep in mind the fact that a single CD

cannot be played even using a single CDadaptor for the unit.

• When a single CD is loaded into the unitaccidentally, it will be ejected immedi-ately. Please be sure to remove it. If you forcefully try to push it into the unitwithout removing it, the CD cannot beejected. This will result in a damage tothe mechanism. Please never do this.

Loading one CD1) Press the load button (1), then press

one of the disc select buttons (2) thatcorresponds to the slot into which youwant to load a CD.

66J143

Both the indication “In” and the selecteddisc number in the CD indicator will blinkfor about 15 seconds.

2) Load the CD into the CD insertion slot(3). When the CD is loaded, play starts.The disk number in the CD indicator willlight.

Loading multiple CDs1) Press the load button (1) for 2 seconds

or longer. The indication “CD ALL” appears in thedisplay, and then the indication “In” anda disc number in the CD indicator willblink for about 15 seconds.

2) Load a CD into the CD insertion slot(3).

3) The indication “In” and the next discnumber will blink in the display. Loadthe next CD.

4) After loading the required number ofCD’s, press any disc select button (2) toselect the desired CD to listen to. If noselect button is pressed, play will startfrom the first loaded CD.

Only the numbers in the CD indicator thatcorrespond to the loaded slots will light.

Ejecting one CD1) Select the CD you want to remove with

the disc select buttons (2).2) Press the CD eject button (4).

If you leave the ejected CD withoutremoving it, it will be drawn into the unitautomatically after about 15 seconds.(Auto reload function)

The buck up eject mechanism:This function allows you to eject the CDloaded in the unit with the unit turned offonly by pressing the CD eject button (4).

CAUTIONYou can load a CD only while the indi-cation “In” is blinking for about 15seconds. During that period, theshutter located in the depth of the CDinsertion slot (3) is opened. After 15seconds time has elapsed, the indi-cation “In” disappears from the dis-play and the shutter closes, making itimpossible to load a CD. If you try toload the CD with the shutter closed,the CD may damage the shutter.Never do this.

5-27


80J23-03E

Ejecting all the CDsPress the CD eject button (4) for 2 secondsor longer. All the CDs will be ejected fromthe unit in a sequential manner.• Please prepare a location where

removed CDs can be stored.• If you leave the ejected CD without

removing it, it will be drawn into the unitautomatically after about 15 seconds.(Auto reload function)

The buck up eject mechanism:This function allows you to eject the CDloaded in the unit with the unit turned offonly by pressing the CD eject button (4).

Listening to a CD1) When a CD is inserted, it is automati-

cally played back. When a CD is already inside the unit,press the disc button (5) to play backthe CD. When a CD is inside the unit,the CD indicator (A) is lit on the displayunit.

2) If you want to play another CD, select itwith the disc select buttons (2). Play starts from the point on the discthat the unit played last (Last positionmemory).



listen to the previous track. When the track down button (7) ispressed once, the track being currentlyplayed will return to the beginning.



track.

Repeat playPress the repeat button (8).Each time the button is pressed, repeatplay mode changes as follows:

66J144

NOTE:This operation should be performed within2 seconds.

To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-ton (8) several times to change the repeatplay mode to OFF.

• TRACK REPEAT The indication “TRACK RPT” appears inthe display for 2 seconds and then therepeat indicator (F) lights. The track currently being played isplayed repeatedly.

• DISC REPEAT The indication “DISC RPT” appears inthe display for 2 seconds and then therepeat indicator (F) lights.When all the tracks on the disc currentlybeing played finish playing, play startsagain at the beginning of the disc.

CAUTIONIf you try to push an ejected CDinside the unit forcibly before autoreloading, the disc surface might bescratched.

TRACK REPEAT

DISC REPEATOFF

5-28


80J23-03E

Listening to an MP3/WMA Disc

80J065

(1)

(2)

(3)(4)

(1)

(3)(4)

(5)

(2)

(5)



Display (Type 1)

66J104

Display (Type 2)

66J105

(1) Sound control knob(2) Repeat button (RPT)(3) Track up button/Fast forward button(4) Track down button/Rewind button(5) Display button (DISP)

(A) Folder number(B) Track number(C) Play time(D) Repeat indicator(E) WMA indicator(F) MP3 indicator(G) CD indicator

(A) (B)

(E) (D)

(C)

(F)

(A) (B) (G)

(E) (D)

(C)

(F)

5-29


80J23-03E

What is MP3/WMA?MP3 (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer-III) and WMA(Windows MediaTM Audio) are the com-pression formats of digital audio. Theformer is developed by MPEG (Motion Pic-ture Experts Group), and the latter isdeveloped by Microsoft Corporation. Usingthese compression formats, you canrecord the contents of about 10 music CDson a single CD media (This figures refer todata recorded on a 650 MB CD-R or CD-RW at a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and asampling frequency of 44.1 kHz).

Points to remember when making MP3/WMA files

Common• High bit rate and high sampling fre-

quency are recommended for high qual-ity sounds.

• Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is notrecommended because playing time isnot displayed properly and sound maybe skipped.

• The playback sound quality differsdepending on the encoding circum-stances. For details, refer to the usermanual of your own encoding softwareand writing software.

MP3• It is recommended to set the bit rate to

“128 kbps or more” and “fixed”.

WMA• It is recommended to set the bit rate to

“64 kbps or more” and “fixed”.• Do not set the copy protect attribute on

the WMA file to enable this unit to playback.

NOTE:Never assign the “.mp3”, or “.wma” filename extension to a file that is not in theMP3/WMA format. This may not only pro-duce noise from the speaker damage, butalso damage your hearing.

Recording MP3/WMA files on a CD-media• You are recommended to minimize the

chances of making a disc that containsboth CD-DA files and MP3/WMA files.

• If CD-DA files are on the same disc asMP3 or WMA files, the songs may notplay in the intended order, or somesongs may not play at all.

• When storing MP3 data and WMA dataon the same disc, use different foldersfor each data.

• Do not record files other than MP3/WMAfiles and unnecessary folder on a disc.

• The name of an MP3/WMA file shouldbe added by rules as shown in the fol-lowing descriptions and also comply withthe rules of each file system.

• The file extension “.mp3” or “.wma”should be assigned to each file depend-ing on the file format.

• You may encounter trouble in playingMP3/WMA files or displaying the infor-mation of MP3/WMA files recorded withcertain writing software or CD recorders.

• This unit does not have a play list func-tion.

• Although Multi-session recording is sup-ported, the use of Disc-at-Once is rec-ommended.

Compression formats

MP3• Bit rate

MPEG1 Audio Layer III : 32 k – 320 kbpsMPEG2 Audio Layer III : 8 k – 160 kbps

• Sampling frequencyMPEG1 Audio Layer III : 44.1 k/48 k/32kHzMPEG2 Audio Layer III : 22.05 k/24 k/16 kHz

WMA (Ver.7, Ver.8, Ver. 9*)• Bit rate

32 k – 192 kbps• Sampling frequency

44.1 k/48 k/32 kHz * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voiceare not supported.

Supported file systemsISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Apple Extensionto ISO 9660, Joliet, Romeo

Maximum number of files/folders• Maximum number of files:

CD Player: 999(files + folders)6-CD Player: 512(files + folders)

5-30


80J23-03E

• Maximum number of files in one folder:255

• Maximum depth of trees: 8• Maximum number of folders: 255

(Root folder is included.)

MP3/WMA MODE

Selecting a folderTurn the sound control knob (1) to select afolder.


Type 1

66J128

Type 2

66J145



• TRACK REPEAT The indication “TRACK RPT” appears inthe display for 2 seconds and then therepeat indicator (D) lights. The track currently being played isplayed repeatedly.

• FOLDER REPEAT The indication “FOLDER RPT” appearsin the display for 2 seconds and then therepeat indicator (D) lights. All the tracks in the folder currently beingplayed are played repeatedly.

• DISC REPEAT The indication “DISC RPT” appears inthe display for 2 seconds and then therepeat indicator (D) lights.When all the tracks on the disc currentlybeing played finish playing, play startsagain at the beginning of the disc.



listen to the previous track. When the track down button (4) ispressed once, the track currently beingplayed will start again at the beginning.



track.

Displaying CD titlesPress the display button (5).Each time the button is pressed, the titlechanges as follows:

66J146

Forwarding a titleIf there is a title with 12 letters or more,each press will show next letters in the dis-play. (No scrolling is made.)Press and hold the display button (5) for 2seconds or longer. A title is changed.

TRACK REPEAT

FOLDER REPEATOFF

TRACK REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT

DISC REPEATOFF

TRACK TITLE

FOLDER TITLE

ARTIST TITLE

OFF

FILE TITLEALBUM TITLE

5-31


80J23-03E

Listening to a XM Satellite Radio (Option)

80J066

(5)(2)

(8)(6)

(3)(4)

(7)

(1)

(5)(2)

(8)(6)

(3)(4)

(7)

(1)



Display

66J107

(1) XM button(2) Category button (CAT)(3) Seek up button(4) Seek down button(5) Manual tuning knob(6) Display button (DISP)(7) Preset button (1 to 6)(8) Scan button (SCAN)

(A) Band(B) Channel number(C) Category indicator

If you want to purchase XM Satellite RadioService, contact your SUZUKI dealer.It is necessary to buy a special tuner toreceive XM broadcasting.

Your vehicle is capable of receiving XMSatellite Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates except Hawaii, Alaska, and Can-ada.

(A) (B)

(C)

5-32


80J23-03E

XM MODE

Selecting a bandPress the XM button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the bandchanges in the following order.

66J129

Selecting a categoryPress the seek up button (3) or the seekdown button (4). The category is changed.

Turning the category function on/offPress and hold the category button (2) for2 seconds or longer, and “CATEGORYON” appears on the display, the CAT indi-cator (c) lights up and the CATEGORYfunction is activated.Press and hold the category button (2) for2 seconds or longer again, and “CATE-GORY OFF” appears on the display andthe CAT indicator turns off, indicating thatthe CATEGORY function has been turnedoff.

NOTE:The first time you use the radio, turn thecategory function on.

Selecting a categoryPress the seek up button (3) or seek downbutton (4) to select a category.

Displaying the categoryPress the category button (2) to have thecurrently selected category appear on thedisplay.

Selecting a channelTurn the manual tuning knob (5) to select achannel.

NOTE:When the category function is on, onlythose channels included in the selectedcategory can be selected.

Selecting the item to be displayedPress the display button (6).Each time the button is pressed, the itemon display changes in the following order.

66J130

Preset memory1) Select the desired station.2) Select the preset button (7) to which

you want to store the station and press

and hold the button for 2 seconds orlonger.

Scan tuning1) Press the scan button (8).

Stations are automatically searched forin a sequential order, starting from thestation being currently received, andscan tuning stops for 5 seconds at thefrequency where there is a station avail-able.

2) Press the scan button (8) again to stopscanning at the frequency currentlybeing received.

Satellite Radio ReceptionSatellite radio receives signals from twosatellites in orbit over the equator. There-fore, satellite radio reception can be inter-rupted when there are objects south ofyour vehicle. To help compensate for this,ground-based repeaters are placed inmajor metropolitan areas, but dependingon the geographic situation (for example, ifmountains or buildings are on the southside of your vehicle), you may experiencereception problems.

XM1 XM2 XM3

CH NUMBER CH NAME

NAMETITLE

5-33


80J23-03E

Listening to Audio for AUX (Option)

80J067

(1)

(1)



Display

66J221

(1) Aux button (CD/AUX)(A) Mode indicator

Aux functionThis system has an external input terminalso you can listen to audio from an externaldevice connected to this unit.

Press the aux button (1).Each time the button is pressed, theselected mode is switched as follows:

66J123

(A)

CD AUX

5-34


80J23-03E

Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer (Option)

80J068

(6)

(5)

(1)

(3)(4)

(1)

(2)

(2)

(6)

(5)

(3)(4)



Display

66J113

(1) Disc button (CD/AUX)(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)(3) Track up button/Fast forward button(4) Track down button/Rewind button(5) Repeat button (RPT)(6) Category button (CAT)

(A) Mode indicator(B) Disc number(C) Track number(D) Play time(E) Repeat indicator(F) Random indicator(G) CD changer number

(A) (B)

(E)

(D)

(F)

(C)

(G)

5-35


80J23-03E

Selecting a CD changer modePress the disc button (1).Each time the button is pressed, theselected CD plays as follows:

52D300

• When only one CD changer is con-nected to this unit, CD changer 2 isskipped.

• When no CD is loaded in the built-in CDplayer, the built-in CD player is skipped.

Selecting a discPress the disc select button (2) corre-sponding to the disc number you want tolisten to.Play starts from the first track on the disc. Ifa disc number having no disc is pressed,the selection will be invalid.



listen to the previous track. When the track down button (4) ispressed once, the track currently beingplayed will start again at the beginning.



track.

Random playPress the category button (6).Each time the button is pressed, the modechanges in the following order.

66J131


To cancel random play, press the categorybutton (6) several times to change the ran-dom play mode to OFF.

• TRACK RANDOM The tracks in the disc that is loaded areplayed at random.

• DISC RANDOM The tracks in all discs are played at ran-dom.

NOTE:The random play can be operated with theExternal CD Changer (Option) only.

Built-in CD player

CD changer 1

CD changer 2

TRACK RANDOM

DISC RANDOMOFF

5-36


80J23-03E


66J144



• TRACK REPEAT The indication “TRACK RPT” appears inthe display for 2 seconds and then therepeat indicator (E) lights. The track being currently played isplayed repeatedly.

• DISC REPEAT The indication “DISC RPT” appears inthe display for 2 seconds and then therepeat indicator (E) lights.When all the tracks on a disc being cur-rently played finish playing, play startsagain at the beginning of the disc.TRACK REPEAT

DISC REPEATOFF

5-37


80J23-03E

Remote Audio Controls (if equipped)

80JC099

You can control basic functions of theaudio system with the switches on thesteering wheel.

To control the volume:• To increase the volume, push the upper

part of the switch (1). The volume contin-ues to increase until you release theswitch.

• To decrease the volume, push the lowerpart of the switch (1). The volume contin-ues to decrease until you release theswitch.

• To mute, push the switch (2).

To select the mode (AM1, AM2, FM1, FM2,XM (option), CD, External CD-changer(option), AUX (option)), push the switch(3).

You can also turn on the audio system bypushing the switch (3).

To change the radio station:• To advance to the next preset station,

push the upper part of the switch (4)briefly.

• To select the previous preset station,push the lower part of the switch (4)briefly.

• To scan to a higher frequency radio sta-tion, push and hold the upper part of theswitch (4).

• To scan to a lower frequency radio sta-tion, push and hold the lower part of theswitch (4).

To change the selection on a CD:• To advance to the next track on a CD,

push the upper part of the switch (4)briefly.

• To select the previous track on a CD,push the lower part of the switch (4).

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

5-38


80J23-03E

Anti-Theft Feature

80J069

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(3)



(1) Power on/off knob(2) Track up button/Fast forward button(3) Preset buttons (1 to 6)

The anti-theft feature is intended to dis-courage theft or the audio system by pre-venting the system from operating when itis moved to a different vehicle.This feature works by allowing you to entera Personal Identification Number (PIN).When the audio system is disconnectedfrom its power source, such as when theaudio system is removed or the battery isdisconnected, the system will not operateagain unless the PIN is reentered.

5-39


80J23-03E

Setting the Anti-Theft Function1) Turn off the power by pressing the

power on/off knob (1).

66J118

2) Press the power on/off knob (1) whilepressing and holding the track up but-ton (2). The “ENTRY 0000” will blinkand the audio system enter PIN-inputmode.

NOTE:Establish your PIN by combining numbersfrom 1 to 6 into any 4-digit number. If youforget your PIN, when you remove the bat-tery for repair etc., you will no longer beable to operate the audio system.

66J117

3) Input the four digit PIN using preset but-tons 1 to 6.

66J118

4) After you enter your four digit PIN, thedisplay will return to “0000”.

66J117

5) Input the same 4-digit number you pre-viously entered.

66J120

6) The power of the audio system will turnoff.

NOTE:Write down your PIN for the future use.

Canceling Your Established PIN SettingThis operation is to be done when youwant to cancel the anti-theft function orchange your PIN.

1) Turn off the power by pressing thepower on/off knob (1).

66J121

2) Press the power on/off knob (1) whilepressing and holding the track up but-ton (2). The “DELETE 0000” will blinkand the audio system will enter the can-cel mode.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

5-40


80J23-03E

66J124

3) Input your PIN. The power of the audiosystem will turn off and your PIN will bedeleted. To change your PIN, first delete yourcurrent PIN, then set a new one.

Confirming Your Personal Identifi-cation Number (PIN)When the main power source is discon-nected such as when you exchange yourbattery, etc, you will have to confirm yourPIN to be able to use the audio system.

To confirm your PIN:

66J122

1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”position.

66J125

2) Input your PIN.If the PIN that you input matches the

registered PIN, the power of the audiosystem will turn off, and you will be ableto operate the audio system.

NOTE:• If you input your PIN incorrectly, “----” will

be displayed and the anti-theft functionlock mode is entered. If you enter anincorrect PIN fewer than 6 times, thelocking time will be for 15 seconds; if youenter an incorrect PIN more than 6times, the locking time will be for 15 min-utes.

• If you forget your PIN and enter a wrongPIN, you cannot perform any furtheroperation.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

5-41


80J23-03E

TroubleshootingApplicable to every device

Radio

CD

Phenomenon Cause Remedy

Power is not turned on. (No sound is produced)

Fuse is blown. Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.

Connections are not properly made. Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.


Too much noise. Not tuned correctly to the frequency of a sta-tion.

Tune correctly to the station frequency.

Stations cannot be selected byseek tuning.

There is no station with strong radio waves. Select stations by manual tuning.


Compact disc cannot be loaded. Another compact disc is already loaded. Eject the compact disc before loading a newone.

Sound skips or is noisy. Compact disc is dirty. Clean the compact disc with a soft cloth.

Compact disc is heavily scratched or warped. Replace with a compact disc with no scratches.

Sound is bad directly after poweris turned on.

Water droplets may form on the internal lenswhen the car is parked in a humid place.

Let dry for about 1 hour with the power on.

5-42


80J23-03E

Error displayThis unit has a number of self-diagnostic functions to protect the system.If a problem should occur, the display shows the type of error. Refer to the table below and take proper measures to correct the problem.If the problem is corrected, the unit will operate normally.

If an error display not listed above appears, turn off the unit and contact your SUZUKI dealer.

Error display Measures to be taken

CD/CD changer “Mechanical error”.This error display indicates a mechanical failure in the CD changer(failure to change or eject a disc).The mechanism is probably damaged. Contact your authorizedSUZUKI dealer.

CD/CD changer “Focus error”.The pick-up-focus is not properly functioning during playback due todamage on the disc or for other reasons.Check disc for damage.

CD/CD changer “Disc error”.The CD is inserted upside down or only an eight-centimeter CDadapter is equipped.Check disc for correct loading.

5-43


80J23-03E

Fuel Filler CapSX4

80JC060

79J049

SX4 SEDAN

56KN029

56KN030

The fuel filler cap is located on the left rearside of the vehicle. The fuel filler door canbe unlocked by pulling up the opener leverlocated on the outboard side of the driver’sseat and can be locked by simply closingthe door.

79K053

To remove the fuel filler cap:1) Open the fuel filler door.2) Remove the cap by turning it counter-

clockwise.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

WARNINGRemove the fuel filler cap slowly. Thefuel may be under pressure and mayspray out, causing injury.

Open Close

EXAMPLE

5-44


80J23-03E

56KN078

NOTE:The cap holder (1) can hold the fuel fillercap (2) when refueling.

To reinstall the fuel filler cap:1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear

several clicks.2) Close the fuel filler door.

Engine Hood

79J077

To open the engine hood:1) Pull the hood release handle located on

the outboard side of the driver’s side ofthe instrument panel. This will disen-gage the engine hood lock halfway.

80J045

2) Push the under-hood release leversideways with your finger, as shown inthe illustration. While pushing the lever,lift up the engine hood.

WARNINGFuel is extremely flammable. Do notsmoke when refueling, and makesure there are no open flames orsparks in the area.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE WARNINGIf you need to replace the fuel cap,use a genuine SUZUKI cap. Use of animproper cap can result in a malfunc-tion of the fuel system or emissioncontrol system. It may also result infuel leakage in the event of an acci-dent.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

5-45


80J23-03E

80JS024

3) Continue to lift up the hood until it ishigh enough to support with the proprod.

To close the engine hood:1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the

prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rodback to the holding clip.

2) Lower the hood close to the bumper,then let it drop down. Make sure thehood is securely latched after closing.

Sun Visor

79K055

The sun visors can be pulled down to blockglare coming through the windshield, orthey can be unhooked and turned to theside to block glare coming through the sidewindow.

The extension (1) can be drawn out toblock glare widely.

Interior Light Switch

64J104

The interior light switch has three posi-tions, which functions as described below.

ON (1)The light comes on and stays on regard-less of whether the door is open or closed.

DOOR (2)The light comes on when the door isopened. After closing all doors, the lightwill remain on for about 15 seconds andthen fade out. If you push in the ignitionswitch or insert the key during this time, thelight will start to fade out immediately. Afterremoving the key from the ignition switch,the light will turn on for about 15 secondsand then fade out.

OFF (3)The light remains off even when the door isopened.

WARNINGMake sure the hood is fully closedand latched before driving. If it is not,it can fly up unexpectedly duringdriving, obstructing your view andresulting in an accident.

CAUTIONWhen unhooking and hooking a sunvisor, be sure to handle it by the hardplastic parts or the sun visor can bedamaged.

(1)

EXAMPLE (1)(2)(3)EXAMPLE

5-46


80J23-03E

79J075

NOTE:The number of doors involved in the light-ing operation of the interior light dependson the vehicle specification. If there is aswitch (rubber projection) at the dooropening as shown, the door is involved inthe lighting operation. The tailgate of SX4is also involved in this operation even with-out the rubber projection.

Luggage Compartment Light (SX4)

79J053

When you open the tailgate with the lug-gage compartment light switch in the “ON”position (1), the light comes on andremains on as long as you keep the tail-gate open.When the luggage compartment lightswitch is in the “OFF” position (2), the lightremains off regardless of whether the tail-gate is opened or closed.

Trunk Light (SX4 SEDAN)

56KN038

When you open the trunk lid, the trunk lightcomes on and remains on as long as youkeep the lid open.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONDo not leave the tailgate open withthe luggage compartment lightswitch in the “ON” position for a longtime, or the battery will discharge.

(1) (2)

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONDo not leave the trunk lid open for along time, or the battery will dis-charge.

5-47


80J23-03E

Spot Light

79J074

Push the switch to turn on the light andpush it again to turn off the light.

Accessory Socket (if equipped)

80J2046

The accessory socket will work when theignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-tion.This socket can be used to provide 12 volt/120 watt power for electrical accessories.

Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray (if equipped)Cigarette Lighter (if equipped)

80J2067

The cigarette lighter will work when theignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-tion.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all theway into the receptacle and release it. Itwill automatically heat up and will pop outto its normal position when it is ready foruse.

CAUTIONUse of inappropriate electrical acces-sories can cause damage to yourvehicle’s electrical system. Makesure that any electrical accessoriesyou use are designed to plug into thistype of socket.

CAUTIONHolding the cigarette lighter in canoverheat and damage the lighter.Release the lighter after you push itin.

5-48


80J23-03E

Ashtray (if equipped)

79J047

You can fit the ashtray into any of the cupholders on the center console.

Assist Grips (if equipped)

54G249

Assist grips are provided for convenience.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the cigarettelighter socket, do not use it as anaccessory power source. Someaccessories’ power plug can damagethe inner mechanism of the cigarettelighter socket.

WARNINGMake sure tobacco is fully extin-guished before closing the ashtrays.Never throw waste in the ashtrays: itcould create a fire hazard.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the assist gripand the molded headlining, do nothang down the assist grip.

5-49


80J23-03E

Glove Box

79J120

To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.To close it, push the lid until it latchessecurely.

Cup Holder and Storage Area (if equipped)

80J046

79J052

Cup holders are provided in the centerconsole.

Bottle holderFront

80JM055

WARNINGNever drive with the glove box lidopen. It could cause injury if an acci-dent occurs.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not use the cup holder or the stor-age bin to hold cups containing hotliquids or sharp-edged, hard orbreakable objects. Objects in thesebins may be thrown about during asudden stop or impact, and couldcause personal injury.

5-50


80J23-03E

Rear

80JM143

You should hold a bottle with a cap in theholder.

Luggage compartment pocket (SX4)

80JM124

To open the lid, slide the lever (1) and pullthe lid.

80JM108

The lid can be installed on the back of theluggage compartment board.

Front Seat Back Pocket (if equipped)

80JC089

This pocket is provided for holding lightand soft things such as gloves, newspa-pers or magazines.

(1)

WARNINGDo not put hard or breakable objectsin the pocket. If an accident occurs,objects such as bottles, cans, etc.can injure the occupants in the rearseat.

EXAMPLE

5-51


80J23-03E

Armrest (if equipped)

80J2068

To use the armrest, pivot it down from thestowed (fully up) position. When not in use,return the armrest to the stowed position.

Shopping Hook (if equipped)Luggage compartment

80JM058

You can hang the shopping bag or othersuitable objects on the hook.This hook is not designed for large orheavy items.

Floor Mats (if equipped)

80J2014

Your vehicle has a fastener to keep thedriver’s side floor mat from sliding forwardand possibly interfering with the pedals.Whenever you put the driver’s side floormat back in the vehicle after it has beenremoved, be sure to hook the floor matgrommet(s) to the fastener(s) and positionthe floor mat properly in the footwell.

When you replace the floor mats in yourvehicle with a different type such as all-weather floor mats, we highly recommendusing genuine SUZUKI floor mats forproper fitting.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the armrest, donot lean onto it or allow a child rideon it.

EXAMPLE

5-52


80J23-03E

Luggage Compartment Cover (if equipped)

80J049

80JM128

Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-gage compartment can be hidden fromview by a luggage compartment cover.

WARNINGFailure to take the following precau-tions may result in the driver’s sidefloor mat interfering with the pedalsand causing a loss of vehicle controlor an accident.• Make sure that the floor mat grom-

met(s) is(are) hooked to the fas-tener(s).

• Never place additional floor matson top of the existing floor mats.

Front

Rear

WARNINGDo not carry items on top of the lug-gage compartment cover, even if theyare small and light. Objects on top ofthe cover could be thrown about in anaccident, causing injury, or couldobstruct the driver’s rear view.

5-53


80J23-03E

Luggage Compartment Board (if equipped)

80JM059

Your vehicle is equipped with the luggagecompartment board in the luggage com-partment. You can place luggage or othercargos on the board or under the board.You can also place tall luggage by stowingthe board on the floor of the luggage com-partment.

To remove the luggage compartmentboard:

80JM060

1) Fold the board forward.

80JM109

2) Lift the board, and remove the boardfrom the vehicle.

80JM062

You can stow the board behind the rearseatback as shown in the illustration.

CAUTIONTo avoid injury, handle the boardcarefully when removing or installing.Do not place the objects taller thanthe luggage compartment coversince objects could obstruct thedriver’s rear view or could damageobjects or the tailgate while driving.

5-54


80J23-03E

To re-install the luggage board to thenormal position:

80JM144

Place the strikers of the luggage board tothe latches on the side and tail end of orig-inal position.

To install the luggage board on the floorof the luggage compartment:

80JM129

1) Unfold the luggage compartment board(1), and insert it along the groove (2) atboth side of the luggage compartmentas shown in the illustration.

2) Slide the board forward.

80JM145

3) Place the strikers of the luggage boardto the latches on the luggage floor.

(1)

(2)

5-55


80J23-03E

Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors (if equipped)Roof rails

79J167

Roof rack anchors

80J082

You can use the roof rails or the roof rackanchors to attach the optional roof rackwhich is available at your SUZUKI dealer. Ifyou use a roof rack, observe the instruc-tions and precautions in this section andprovided with the roof rack.

• Make sure the roof rack is securelyinstalled.

• To mount various types of cargo (suchas skis, bicycles, etc.) properly, use suit-able attachments which are availablefrom your SUZUKI dealer. Be sure toinstall the attachments properly andsecurely according to the instructionsprovided. Do not mount cargo directly onthe roof panel. The cargo can damagethe roof panel.

• The gross weight of the roof rack pluscargo must not exceed the loadingcapacity (50 kg (110 lbs)). Also, do notlet the gross vehicle weight (fully loadedvehicle including driver, passengers,cargo, roof load and trailer tongueweight) exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) listed in thedriver’s door lock pillar.

• Mount and secure the cargo onto theroof rack properly according to theinstructions provided. Be sure to stowthe heaviest items at the bottom and dis-tribute the cargo as evenly as possible.

• Do not carry items so large that theyhang over the bumpers or the sides ofthe vehicle, or block your view.

• Secure the front and rear ends of longitems – such as wood panels, surfboardsand so forth – to both the front and rearof the vehicle. You should protect thepainted surfaces of the vehicle fromscuffing caused by tie-down ropes.

• Check periodically to make sure the roofrack is securely installed and free fromdamage.

• For vehicles with roof rack anchors,make sure the anchors are covered withthe caps when not in use.

WARNING• Abrupt maneuvers or failure to

properly secure cargo can allow thecargo to fly off the vehicle and hitothers, causing personal injury orproperty damage.

• Mount cargo securely and avoidabrupt maneuvers such as “jack-rabbit” starts, sharp turns, fast cor-nering and sudden braking. Checkperiodically to make sure thatcargo is securely fastened.

• Large, bulky, long, or flat items canaffect vehicle aerodynamics or becaught by the wind, and can reducevehicle control resulting in an acci-dent and personal injury. Drive cau-tiously at a safely reduced speedwhen carrying this type of cargo.

5-56


80J23-03E

Frame HooksSX4

Front (1)

80J2049

SX4 SEDAN

Front (1)

80J2050

Front bumper cover (if equipped)

80JM111

To use the frame hook:1) Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the

hole (b) and remove the clips (a) bytwist the driver as shown in the illustra-tion.

2) Remove the bumper cover (c).

NOTE:When return the cover, make sure theungual (d) of the cover securely fit to theslit on under the front bumper of vehicle.

(1)EXAMPLE

(1)EXAMPLE

(b)

(c)

(a)

(d)

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONIf towing your vehicle, use the framehook of removed bumper cover sideto prevent damage to the vehicle.

5-57


80J23-03E

SX4

Rear (2)

80JC061

SX4 SEDAN

Rear (2)

56KN033

Side (3)

80JC062

79J132

Frame hooks are provided on the front (1),rear (2) and side (3) of the vehicle. Thehooks (1) and (2) are used for emergencysituations. The hooks (3) are used fortrailer/train shipping purposes.

To tow your vehicle on the road or highway,follow the instruction of “Towing” in “EMER-GENCY SERVICE” section.

(2) EXAMPLE

(2) EXAMPLE

(3) EXAMPLE

(3)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not use the frame hooks to towanother vehicle or to have your vehi-cle towed on the road or highway.The hooks (1) and (2) are designedfor use in emergency situations only,such as if your vehicle or anothervehicle gets stuck in deep mud orsnow.The hooks (3) are provided for trailer/train shipping purposes.

CAUTIONNever use the hooks (1) and (2) fortrailer/train shipping purposes to pre-vent damage to the vehicle.

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

6

80J23-03E

54G215

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWINGVehicle Loading ................................................................... 6-1Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 6-2Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) ...................... 6-2

6-1


80J23-03E

Vehicle Loading

80JS025

Your vehicle was designed for specificweight capacities. The weight capacities ofyour vehicle are indicated by the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR, front and rear)and the Vehicle Capacity Weight. TheGVWR and GAWR (front and rear) arelisted on the Safety Certification Labelwhich is located below the driver’s sidedoor latch striker. The Vehicle CapacityWeight is listed on the Tire InformationLabel which is located below the SafetyCertification Label.

GVWR – Maximum permissible overallweight of the fully loaded vehicle (includingall the occupants, accessories and cargo).GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximum per-missible weight on an individual axle.

Vehicle Capacity Weight – Maximum per-missible load weight a vehicle can carryincluding the weight of all the occupants,accessories and cargo.

The weight of any accessories alreadyinstalled on your vehicle at the time of pur-chase, or that you or the dealer install afterpurchase, must be subtracted from theVehicle Capacity Weight to determine howmuch capacity remains available for occu-pants and cargo. Contact your dealer forfurther information.

Actual weight of the loaded vehicle andactual loads at the front and rear axles canonly be determined by weighing the vehicleusing a vehicle scale. To measure theweight and load, try taking your vehicle toa highway weighing station, shipping com-pany or inspection station for trucks, etc.Compare these weights to the GVWR andGAWR (front and rear) listed on the SafetyCertification Label. If the gross vehicleweight or the load on either axle exceedsthese ratings, you must remove enoughweight to bring the load down to the ratedcapacity.

WARNINGNever overload your vehicle. Thegross vehicle weight (sum of theweights of the loaded vehicle, driverand passengers) must never exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) listed on the Safety Certifica-tion Label. In addition, never distrib-ute a load so that the weight on eitherthe front or rear axle exceeds theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)listed on the Safety CertificationLabel.

WARNING• Always distribute cargo evenly.• To avoid personal injury or damage

to your vehicle, always securecargo to prevent it from shifting ifthe vehicle moves suddenly.

• Place heavier objects on the floorand as far forward in the trunk or inthe cargo area as possible.

• Never pile cargo higher than thetop of the seat backs.

Exhaust Gas Warning: NODaily Inspection Checklist: NO

6-2


80J23-03E

Trailer Towing

54G639

Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. Thevehicle is not designed or intended forsuch use. Towing a trailer can adverselyaffect handling, durability and fuel econ-omy.

Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing)Your vehicle may be towed behind anothervehicle (such as a motorhome), providedyou use the proper towing method speci-fied for your vehicle. The towing methodyou must use depends on the specifica-tions of your vehicle: whether it is a 2-wheel drive (2WD) or intelligent All WheelDrive (i-AWD) vehicle.

Use the towing instruction table to selectthe proper towing method for your vehicle,and carefully follow the correspondinginstructions. Be sure to use proper towingequipment designed for recreational tow-ing and make sure that towing speed doesnot exceed 90 km/h (55 mph).

TOWING INSTRUCTION TABLE

80J2051

WARNINGAlways use a safety chain when tow-ing your vehicle and be sure toobserve federal, state, and localrequirements for trailer hitches, towbars, lights, etc.

DRIVE TRAIN

TRANS-AXLE

TOWING METHOD

2WD

CVT (AUTO) A

M/T (MANUAL) A B

i-AWDincluding

2WD mode

CVT none

M/T B

CAUTIONFor the CVT of intelligent All WheelDrive (i-AWD) models, don’t tow yourvehicle behind another vehicle suchas a motorhome, or the drive trainmay be seriously damaged.

Daily Inspection Checklist: NOStarting the Engine: 1

6-3


80J23-03E

80J2052

TOWING METHOD A

FROM THE FRONT:FRONT WHEELS ON A DOLLY AND REAR WHEELS ON THE GROUND

A: 2WD (except 2WD mode of i-AWD)VEHICLES WITH MANUAL TRANS-AXLE OR CVT1) Secure the front wheels on a towing

dolly according to the instructions pro-vided by the dolly manufacturer.

2) Release the parking brake.

80J2053

CAUTIONTowing the 2WD or i-AWD CVT vehi-cles with four wheels on the groundcan result in damage to the CVT.

Engine Block Heater: 1

6-4


80J23-03E

80J2079

TOWING METHOD B

FROM THE FRONT:FOUR WHEELS ON THE GROUND

B: 2WD or i-AWD (including 2WD mode)VEHICLES WITH MANUAL TRANSAXLE1) Shift the manual transaxle lever into

neutral.2) Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” posi-

tion to unlock the steering wheel.3) Release the parking brake.

80J2054

CAUTIONThe steering column is not strongenough to withstand shocks trans-mitted from the front wheels duringtowing. Always unlock the steeringwheel before towing.

CAUTIONTowing the 2WD or i-AWD CVT vehi-cles with four wheels on the groundcan result in damage to the CVT.

Using the Transaxle: 10

6-5


80J23-03E

MEMO

Using the Transaxle: 10

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

7

80J23-03E

60G410

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEMaintenance Schedule ....................................................... 7-2Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 7-3Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions ........................................................................... 7-7Drive Belt ............................................................................. 7-11Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 7-11Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-14Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 7-16Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 7-16Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-18Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 7-19Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) Fluid .................. 7-20Brakes .................................................................................. 7-21Steering Wheel .................................................................... 7-23Tires ...................................................................................... 7-24Battery .................................................................................. 7-35Fuses .................................................................................... 7-36Headlight Aiming ................................................................. 7-39Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-40Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-46Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-50Air Conditioning System .................................................... 7-50

7-1


80J23-03E

60A187S

WARNINGYou should take extreme care whenworking on your vehicle to preventaccidental injury. Here are a few pre-cautions that you should be espe-cially careful to observe:• To prevent damage or unintended

inflation of the air bag system, besure the battery is disconnectedand the ignition switch has been inthe “LOCK” position for at least 90seconds before performing anyelectrical service work on yourSUZUKI. Do not touch air bag sys-tem components or wires. Thewires are wrapped with yellow tapeor yellow tubing, and the couplersare yellow for easy identification.

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• Do not leave the engine running in

garages or other confined areas.• When the engine is running, keep

hands, clothing, tools and otherobjects away from the moving fanand drive belt.

• When it is necessary to do servicework with the engine running, makesure that the parking brake is setfully and the transaxle is in Neutral(for manual transaxle vehicles) orPark (for CVT vehicles).

• Do not touch ignition wires or otherignition system parts when startingthe engine or when the engine isrunning, or you could receive anelectric shock.

• Be careful not to touch a hotengine, exhaust manifold andpipes, muffler, radiator and waterhoses.

• Do not allow smoking, sparks orflames around fuel or the battery.Flammable fumes are present.

• Do not get under your vehicle if it issupported only with the portablejack provided in your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• Be careful not to cause accidental

short circuits between the positiveand negative battery terminals.

• Keep used oil, engine coolant andother fluids away from children andpets. Dispose of used fluids prop-erly; never pour them on theground, into sewers, etc.

Highway Driving: NODriving on Hills: NO

7-2


80J23-03E

NOTICE (for U.S.A.)Maintenance, replacement or repair ofthe emission control devices and sys-tems may be performed by any automo-bile repair establishment or individualusing any part which has been certifiedunder the provisions in the Clean AirAct sec. 207. (a) (2).

Maintenance ScheduleThe following table shows the times whenyou should perform regular maintenanceon your vehicle. This table shows in miles,kilometers and months when you shouldperform inspections, adjustments, lubrica-tion and other services. These intervalsshould be shortened if driving is usuallydone under severe conditions (refer to“Maintenance Recommended UnderSevere Driving Conditions”).

WARNINGSUZUKI recommends that mainte-nance on items marked with an aster-isk (*) be performed by yourauthorized SUZUKI dealer or a quali-fied service technician. If you arequalified, you may perform mainte-nance on the unmarked items byreferring to the instructions in thissection. If you are not sure whetheryou can successfully complete any ofthe unmarked maintenance jobs, askyour authorized SUZUKI dealer to dothe maintenance for you.

CAUTIONWhenever it becomes necessary toreplace parts on your vehicle, it isrecommended that you use genuineSUZUKI replacement parts or theirequivalent.

WARNINGThe shock absorbers are filled withhigh pressure gas. Never attempt todisassemble them or throw them intoa fire. Avoid storing them near aheater or heating device. Whenscrapping the absorber, the gas mustbe released from the absorber safely.Ask your dealer for assistance.

Driving on Hills: NODriving on Slippery Roads: NO

7-3


80J23-03E

Periodic Maintenance ScheduleR: Replace or changeI : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

#1: Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue), follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green).

Interval: This interval should be judged byodometer reading or months, whichever comesfirst.

miles (x 1000) 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75km (x 1000) 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100 112.5 125months 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75

ENGINE & EMISSION CONTROL1. Drive belt

Inspect for damage – – – I – – – I – –*2. Valve lash (clearance) – – – – – – – I – –3. Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R R

*4. Cooling system hoses and connections – – – I – – – I – –5. Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – – R – – – R – –

SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) (#1) First time only: Replace at 150000 km (90000 miles) or 90 monthsSecond time and after: Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles) or 45 months

*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings – – – I – – – I – –*7. EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes – – – – – – – I – –9. Spark plugs – – – – – – – R – –

*10. Ignition coil (plug cap) – – – I – – – I – –*11. Fuel tank & cap – I – I – I – I – I12. Air cleaner filter element (paved road) – – – R – – – R – –

*13. Fuel filter – – – – – – – – – –*14. Fuel lines and connections – – – I – – – I – –*15. Canister air suction filter Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months

Driving on Slippery Roads: NO

7-4


80J23-03E

R: Replace or changeI : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary


#2: Inspect at 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months.

NOTE:The maintenance services enclosed with rectangle are recommended maintenance items.

Interval: This interval should be judged byodometer reading or months, whichever comesfirst.



Inspect for damage – I – – – I – – – I*2. Valve lash (clearance) – – – – – I – – – –3. Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R R

*4. Cooling system hoses and connections – I – – – I – – – I5. Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – R – – – R – – – R


*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings – I – – – I – – – I*7. EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes – – – – – I – – – I9. Spark plugs – – – – – R – – – –

*10. Ignition coil (plug cap) – I – – – I – – – I*11. Fuel tank & cap – I – I – I – I – I (#2)12. Air cleaner filter element (paved road) – R – – – R – – – R

*13. Fuel filter – – – – – – – – – R*14. Fuel lines and connections – I – – – I – – – I (#2)*15. Canister air suction filter Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform recom-mended maintenance items enclosed with a rectangle will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completionof the vehicle’s useful life. SUZUKI, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated inter-vals and the maintenance recorded.

Driving on Slippery Roads: NO

7-5


80J23-03E


Interval: This interval should be judged by odometerreading or months, whichever comes first.


CHASSIS AND BODY1. Clutch (for manual transaxle)

Pedal and fluid level – I – I – I – I – I*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear) I – I – I – I – I –

Brake drums and shoes (rear) I – I – I – I – I –*3. Brake hoses and pipes I – I – I – I – I –4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement – I – I – I – R – I5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment – I – I – I – I – I6. Parking brake lever and *cable

Lever movement check, *adjustment I – I – I – I – I –7. Tires (including tire rotation) I I I I I I I I I I8. Wheel discs I I I I I I I I I I

*9. Suspension system I I I I I I I I I I*10. Propeller shafts (i-AWD)/Drive axle boots I I I I I I I I I I*11. Manual transaxle oil

Level check, *replacement I – – I – I – I – I12. Continuously variable transaxle (CVT) Fluid level – I – I – I – I – I

*Fluid hose – – – – – I – – – –*13. Transfer oil (i-AWD) I – – I – I – R – I*14. Rear differential oil (i-AWD) R – – I – I – I – I15. Steering system

Steering wheel movement, *linkage I I I I I I I I I I16. Power steering (if equipped) I I I I I I I I I I17. All latches, hinges and locks I I I I I I I I I I18. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) – I – R – I – R – I

7-6


80J23-03E


NOTE:This table shows the service schedule up to 250000 km (150000 miles).Beyond 250000 km (150000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.Beyond 250000 km (150000 miles), the maintenance services enclosed with a rectangle are required.




Pedal and fluid level – I – I – I – I – I*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear) I – I – I – I – I –

Brake drums and shoes (rear) I – I – I – I – I –*3. Brake hoses and pipes I – I – I – I – I –4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement – I – I – R – I – I5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment – I – I – I – I – I6. Parking brake lever and *cable

Lever movement check, *adjustment I – I – I – I – I –7. Tires (including tire rotation) I I I I I I I I I I8. Wheel discs I I I I I I I I I I

*9. Suspension system I I I I I I I I I I*10. Propeller shafts (i-AWD)/Drive axle boots I I I I I I I I I I*11. Manual transaxle oil

Level check, *replacement – R – I – I – I – I12. Continuously variable transaxle (CVT) Fluid level – I – I – I – I – I

*Fluid hose – I – – – – – I – –*13. Transfer oil (i-AWD) – I – I – R – I – I*14. Rear differential oil (i-AWD) – I – I – I – I – I15. Steering system

Steering wheel movement, *linkage I I I I I I I I I I16. Power steering (if equipped) I I I I I I I I I I17. All latches, hinges and locks I I I I I I I I I I18. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) – R – I – R – I – R

7-7


80J23-03E

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving ConditionsFollow this schedule if your car is mainly operated under one or more of the following conditions:• When most trips are less than 6 kilometers (4 miles)• When most trips are less than 16 kilometers (10 miles) and outside temperature remain below freezing.• Idling and/or low-speed operation in stop-and-go traffic.• Operating in dusty areas.Schedule should also be followed if the car is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial applications.



Interval: This interval should be judged byodometer reading or months, whichevercomes first.

miles (x 1000) 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39km (x 1000) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39


Inspect for damage – – – – – – – – – I – – –*2. Valve lash (clearance) – – – – – – – – – – – – –3. Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R

*4. Cooling system hoses and connections – – – – I – – – – I – – –5. Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – – – – – – – – R – – –


*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings – – – – I – – – – I – – –*7. EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes – – – – – – – – – – – – –9. Spark plugs – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*10. Ignition coil (plug cap) – – – – – – – – – I – – –*11. Fuel tank & cap – – – – I – – – – I – – –12. Air cleaner filter element (paved road) I I I I I I I I I R I I I

*13. Fuel filter Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 150 months*14. Fuel lines and connections – – – – I – – – – I – – –*15. Canister air suction filter – – – – – – – – – – – – –

7-8


80J23-03E



Interval: This interval should be judged byodometer reading or months, whichevercomes first.

miles (x 1000) 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75km (x 1000) 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125months 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75


Inspect for damage – – – – – – I – – – – –*2. Valve lash (clearance) – – – – – – I – – – – –3. Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R

*4. Cooling system hoses and connections – I – – – – I – – – – I5. Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – – – – – R – – – – –


*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings – I – – – – I – – – – I*7. EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes – – – – – – I – – – – –9. Spark plugs – – – – – – R – – – – –

*10. Ignition coil (plug cap) – – – – – – I – – – – –*11. Fuel tank & cap – I – – – – I – – – – I12. Air cleaner filter element (paved road) I I I I I I R I I I I I

*13. Fuel filter Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 150 months*14. Fuel lines and connections – I – – – – I – – – – I*15. Canister air suction filter – – – – – – – – – – – R

7-9


80J23-03E



miles (x 1000) 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39km (x 1000) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39


Pedal and fluid level – – – – I – – – – I – – –*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear) – I – I – – – I – – – I –

Brake drums and shoes (rear) – I – I – – – I – – – I –*3. Brake hoses and pipes – I – I – – – I – – – I –4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement – – – – I – – – – I – – –5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment – – – – I – – – – I – – –6. Parking brake lever and *cable

Lever movement check, *adjustment – I – – I – – – – I – – –7. Tires (including tire rotation) – I – I – I – I – I – I –8. Wheel discs – I – I – I – I – I – I –

*9. Wheel bearings – – – I – – – I – – – I –*10. Suspension system – I – I – I – I – I – I –*11. Propeller shafts (i-AWD)/Drive axle boots – I – I – I – I – I – I –*12. Manual transaxle oil

Level check, *replacement – – – – I – – – – I – – –13. Continuously variable transaxle (CVT) Fluid level – – – – I – – – – I – – –

*Fluid deterioration check*2 – – – – I – – – – I – – –*Fluid hose – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*14. Transfer oil (i-AWD) – – – – R – – – – R – – –*15. Rear differential oil (i-AWD) – – – – R – – – – R – – –16. Steering system

Steering wheel movement, *linkage – I – I – I – I – I – I –17. Power steering (if equipped) – I – I – I – I – I – I –18. All latches, hinges and locks – I – I – I – I – I – I –19. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)*1 – I – I – I – I – R – I –

7-10


80J23-03E


NOTE:This table shows the service schedule up to 125000 km (75000 miles).Beyond 125000 km (75000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.*1 Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air conditioner decreases.*2 Check or replace as necessary if you usually drive with high speed or high engine revolutions.


miles (x 1000) 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75km (x 1000) 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125months 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75


Pedal and fluid level – I – – – – I – – – – I*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear) – – I – – – I – – – I –

Brake drums and shoes (rear) – – I – – – I – – – I –*3. Brake hoses and pipes – – I – – – I – – – I –4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement – I – – – – R – – – – I5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment – I – – – – I – – – – I6. Parking brake lever and *cable

Lever movement check, *adjustment – I – – – – I – – – – I7. Tires (including tire rotation) I – I – I – I – I – I –8. Wheel discs I – I – I – I – I – I –

*9. Wheel bearings – – I – – – I – – – I –*10. Suspension system I – I – I – I – I – I –*11. Propeller shafts (i-AWD)/Drive axle boots I – I – I – I – I – I –*12. Manual transaxle oil

Level check, *replacement – R – – – – I – – – – I13. Continuously variable transaxle (CVT) Fluid level – I – – – – I – – – – I

*Fluid deterioration check*2 – I – – – – I – – – – I*Fluid hose – I – – – – – – – – – –

*14. Transfer oil (i-AWD) – R – – – – R – – – – R*15. Rear differential oil (i-AWD) – R – – – – R – – – – R16. Steering system

Steering wheel movement, *linkage I – I – I – I – I – I –17. Power steering (if equipped) I – I – I – I – I – I –18. All latches, hinges and locks I – I – I – I – I – I –19. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)*1 I – I – I – R – I – I –

7-11


80J23-03E

Drive Belt

Check the accessory drive belt only fordamage. You do not need check it for ten-sion as it has an automatic tensioner.

If you need to replace or adjust the belthave it done by your SUZUKI dealer.

80J2055

Engine Oil and FilterSpecified Oil

80JC103

Use engine oil with the American Petro-leum Institute Certified For GasolineEngines “Starburst” symbol.

We highly recommend you use SAE 5W-30 oil.

Oil Level CheckEngine oil dipstick

80G064

It is important to keep the engine oil at thecorrect level for proper lubrication of yourvehicle’s engine. Check the oil level withthe vehicle on a level surface. The oil levelindication may be inaccurate if the vehicleis on a slope. The oil level should bechecked either before starting the engineor at least 5 minutes after stopping theengine.

WARNINGWhen the engine is running, keephands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. awayfrom the moving fan and drive belts.

→: 100 N (10 kg, 22 lbs) pressADB: Accessory drive beltGE: GeneratorDEF: DeflectionAC: Air conditioner compressor

L4 2.0L

GE

ADB

AC CAUTIONFailure to use the recommended oilcan result in engine damage.

“Starburst”

7-12


80J23-03E

52D084

The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-ored yellow for easy identification.

Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with aclean cloth, insert the dipstick all the wayinto the engine, then remove it again. Theoil on the stick should be between theupper and lower limits shown on the stick.

If the oil level indication is near the lowerlimit, add enough oil to raise the level to theupper limit.

Refilling

81A147

Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowlythrough the filler hole to bring the oil levelto the upper limit on the dipstick. Be carefulnot to overfill. Too much oil is almost asbad as too little oil. After refilling, start theengine and allow it to idle for about aminute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 min-utes and check the oil level again.

Changing Engine Oil and Filter

60G306

Drain the engine oil while the engine is stillwarm.1) Remove the oil filler cap.2) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.3) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug

and drain out the engine oil.

EXAMPLE FULLADD

EXAMPLE

Open Close

WARNINGThe engine oil temperature may behigh enough to burn your fingerswhen the drain plug is loosened. Waituntil the drain plug is cool enough totouch with your bare hands.

EXAMPLE

7-13


80J23-03E

4) Reinstall the drain plug and gasket.Tighten the plug with a wrench to thespecified torque.

Replace the Oil Filter

60A198

1) Remove the engine under cover.2) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil fil-

ter counterclockwise and remove it.3) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mount-

ing surface on the engine where thenew filter will be seated.

4) Smear a little engine oil around the rub-ber gasket of the new oil filter.

5) Screw on the new filter by hand until thefilter gasket contacts the mounting sur-face.

54G093

(1) Oil filter(2) 3/4 turn

6) Tighten the filter 3/4 turn from the pointof contact with the mounting surface (orto the specified torque) using an oil filterwrench.

WARNINGNew and used oil and solvent can behazardous. Children and pets may beharmed by swallowing new or usedoil or solvent. Repeated, prolongedcontact with used engine oil maycause [skin] cancer. Brief contactwith used oil or solvent may irritateskin.• Keep new and used oil and solvent

away from children and pets.• Wear a long-sleeve shirt and water-

proof gloves.• Wash with soap if oil or solvent

contacts your skin.

Tightening torque specification

35 Nm (25.3 lb-ft, 3.5 kg-m)

CAUTIONTo tighten the oil filter properly, it isimportant to accurately identify theposition at which the filter gasketfirst contacts the mounting surface.

EXAMPLE

Tightening torque specification

14 Nm (10.0 lb-ft, 1.4 kg-m)

CAUTIONTo prevent oil leakage, make surethat the oil filter is tight, but do notovertighten it.

7-14


80J23-03E

NOTE:When it is difficult to remove the oil filter,we recommend you take your vehicle toyour SUZUKI dealer for oil filter replace-ment.

Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks1) Pour oil through the filler hole and

install the filler cap. For the approximate capacity of the oil,refer to the “Capacities” item in the“SPECIFICATIONS” section.

2) Start the engine and look carefully forleaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Runthe engine at various speeds for at least5 minutes.

3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min-utes. Check the oil level again and addoil if necessary. Check for leaks again.

80J014

Engine CoolantSelection of Coolant

To maintain optimum performance anddurability of your engine, use SUZUKIGenuine Coolant or equivalent.

NOTE:If you replace the engine coolant otherthan the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue), followthe schedule of SUZUKI LLC: Standard(Green). To see the detail of the mainte-nance schedule, refer to “Periodic Mainte-nance Schedule” in this section.

This type of coolant is best for your coolingsystem as it:• Helps maintain proper engine tempera-

ture.• Gives proper protection against freezing

and boiling.• Gives proper protection against corro-

sion and rust.

CAUTIONWhen replacing the oil filter, it is rec-ommended that you use a genuineSUZUKI replacement filter. If you usean after-market filter, make sure it isof equivalent quality and carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructionsand precautions.

CAUTIONOil leaks from around the oil filter ordrain plug indicate incorrect installa-tion or gasket damage. If you find anyleaks or are not sure that the filterhas been properly tightened, havethe vehicle inspected by your SUZUKIdealer.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONSUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant; SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant isalready diluted to the proper percent-age. Do not dilute with distilled wateradditionally. Doing so may result inthe possibility of freezing coolantand/or overheating.

7-15


80J23-03E

Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-age your cooling system. Your authorizedSUZUKI dealer can help you select theproper coolant.

Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level at thereserve tank, not at the radiator. With theengine cool, the engine coolant levelshould be between the “FULL” and “LOW”marks.

Adding Coolant

56KN090

If the engine coolant level is below the“LOW” mark, more engine coolant shouldbe added. Remove the reserve tank capand add engine coolant until the reservetank level reaches the “FULL” mark. Neverfill the reserve tank above the “FULL” mark.

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging your cooling sys-tem:• Always use a high quality ethylene

glycol base phosphate type coolantdiluted with distilled water at thecorrect mixture concentration.

• Make sure that the proper mix is 50/50 coolant to distilled water and inno case higher than 70/30. Concen-trations greater than 70/30 coolantto distilled water will cause over-heating conditions.

• Do not use straight coolant norplain water (except SUZUKI LLC:Super (Blue)).

• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi-tives. They may not be compatiblewith your cooling system.

• Do not mix different types of basecoolants. Doing so may result inaccelerated seal wear and/or thepossibility of severe overheatingand extensive engine/CVT damage.

WARNINGEngine coolant is harmful or fatal ifswallowed or inhaled. Do not drinkantifreeze or coolant solution. If swal-lowed, do not induce vomiting. Imme-diately contact a poison controlcenter or a physician. Avoid inhalingmist or hot vapors; if inhaled, removeto fresh air. If coolant gets in eyes,flush eyes with water and seek medi-cal attention. Wash thoroughly afterhandling. Solution can be poisonousto animals. Keep out of the reach ofchildren and animals.

CAUTIONSUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant; SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant isalready diluted to the proper percent-age. Do not dilute with distilled wateradditionally. Doing so may result inthe possibility of freezing coolantand/or overheating.

7-16


80J23-03E

Coolant ReplacementSince special procedures are required, werecommend you take your vehicle to yourSUZUKI dealer for coolant replacement.

Air Cleaner

80J2056

If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, therewill be greater intake resistance, resultingin decreased power output and increasedfuel consumption.

Unclamp the side clamps, and remove theelement from the air cleaner case. If itappears to be dirty, replace it with a newone.

Spark PlugsYou should inspect spark plugs periodicallyfor carbon deposits. When carbon accu-mulates on a spark plug, a strong sparkmay not be produced. Remove carbondeposits with a wire or pin and adjust thespark plug gap.

To access the spark plugs,

80J2069

1) Remove the air cleaner inlet hose (1).Remove the front part (2), then removethe rear part (3) of the air cleaner case.

CAUTIONSUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) coolant;• The mixture you use should con-

tain 50% concentration of anti-freeze.

• If the lowest ambient temperaturein your area is expected to be –35°C (–31°F) or below, use higherconcentrations up to 60% followingthe instructions on the antifreezecontainer.

CAUTIONWhen putting the cap on the reser-voir tank, line up the mark on the capand the mark on the tank. Failure tofollow this can result in coolant leak-age.

CAUTIONThe air cleaner element should bereplaced every 50000 km (30000miles). More frequent replacement isnecessary when you drive underdusty conditions.

CAUTIONWhen remove the engine cover, makesure the cover does not interfere thevehicle to avoid damage to the cover.

(1)

(2)

(3)

7-17


80J23-03E

80J2070

2) Disconnect the coupler (4) while push-ing the release lever,

3) Remove the bolt, and4) Pull the ignition coil out.

80G093

(4)

EXAMPLE CAUTION• When servicing the iridium/plati-

num spark plugs (slender centerelectrode type plugs), do not touchthe center electrode, as it is easy todamage.

• When installing the spark plugs,screw them in with your fingers toavoid stripping the threads. Tightenwith a torque wrench to 25 Nm (2.5kg-m, 18.0 lb-ft). Do not allow con-taminants to enter the enginethrough the spark plug holes whenthe plugs are removed.

• Never use spark plugs with thewrong thread size.

CAUTIONWhen replacing spark plugs, youshould use the brand and type speci-fied for your vehicle. For the speci-fied plugs, refer to the“SPECIFICATIONS” section at theend of this book. If you wish to use abrand of spark plug other than thespecified plugs, consult your SUZUKIdealer.

1.0 – 1.1 mm (0.039 – 0.043 in.)

7-18


80J23-03E

Gear OilSpecified Gear OilWhen replacing gear oil, use gear oil withthe appropriate viscosity and grade asshown in the charts below.

We highly recommend you use:“SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80” for manualtransaxle gear oil

Manual transaxle (API GL-4)

80J2087

We highly recommend you use:API GL-5 hypoid gear oil SAE 80W-90 forrear differential oil (i-AWD) and transfer oilof CVT model (i-AWD)

Rear differential oil (i-AWD)/Transfer oilof CVT model (i-AWD) (API GL-5 Hypoid)

54G096

Manual transaxle

80J2083

Transfer case (i-AWD)

80J007

(1) Oil filler and level plug

CFo

o -30-22

-20-4

-1014 32 50 68 86 104

0 10 20 30 40

75W-80, 75W-85, 75W-90

API GRADE

Manual transaxle GL-4

Rear differential oil (i-AWD)/Transfer oil (i-AWD CVT)

GL-5 (Hypoid gear oil)

(1)

EXAMPLE

(1)

7-19


80J23-03E

Rear differential (i-AWD)

80J015

(1) Oil filler and level plug

Tightening torque

Gear Oil Level CheckThe manual transaxle, transfer gears (i-AWD CVT) and rear differential (i-AWD)are lubricated with gear oil. To check thegear oil level in any of the above locations,use the following procedure:

1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. Setparking brake and stop the engine.

2) Remove the oil filler plug (1).

For the manual transaxle;3) If gear oil flow from the plug hole, the oil

level is correct. Reinstall the plug.If gear oil do not flow from the plughole, add oil through the filler plug holeuntil a little oil flow from the plug hole.

For the transfer and rear differential;3) Check the inside of the hole with your

finger. If the oil level comes up to thebottom of the plug hole, the oil level iscorrect. If so, reinstall the plug.

4) If the oil level is low, add gear oilthrough the filler plug hole (1) until theoil level reaches the bottom of the fillerhole.

Gear Oil ReplacementSince special procedures, materials andtools are required, it is recommended thatyou trust this job to your authorizedSUZUKI dealer.

Clutch Pedal

80J004

Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-tion and clutch fluid level from time to time.If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fullydepressed, have the clutch inspected byyour SUZUKI dealer. If the clutch fluid levelis near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the “MAX”line with SAE J1703 or DOT3 brake fluid.

Oil Filler Plug

Manual transaxle27 Nm

(19.5 lb-ft) (2.7 kg-m)

Transfer 23 Nm (16.6 lb-ft) (2.3 kg-m)Rear differential

(1)

7-20


80J23-03E

Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) FluidSpecified FluidUse a CVT fluid SUZUKI CVT FLUIDGREEN-1 or Shell GREEN-1V.

Fluid Level Check

You must check the fluid level with the CVTfluid at normal operating temperature.

To check the fluid level:1) To warm up the transaxle fluid, drive the

vehicle or idle the engine until the tem-perature gauge indicates normal oper-ating temperature.

2) Then drive for ten more minutes.

NOTE:Do not check the fluid level if you have justdriven the vehicle for a long time at highspeed, or if you have driven in city traffic in

hot weather. Wait until the fluid cools down(about 30 minutes), or the fluid level indica-tion will not be correct.

3) Park your vehicle on level ground.4) Apply the parking brake and then start

the engine in “P” (Park). Let it idle fortwo minutes and keep it running duringthe fluid level check.

5) With your foot on the brake pedal, movethe gearshift lever through each gear,pausing for about three seconds ineach range. Then move it back to the“P” (Park) position.

75F086

80J2071

80J2072

(1) FULL(2) LOW(3) The lowest point = Fluid level

CAUTIONDriving with too much or too littlefluid can damage the transaxle.

CAUTIONBe sure to use the specified CVTfluid. Using CVT fluid other thanSUZUKI CVT FLUID GREEN-1 or ShellGREEN-1V may damage the CVT ofyour vehicle.

WARNINGBe sure to depress the brake pedalwhen moving the gearshift lever, orthe vehicle can move suddenly.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(2)

H

C

(1)

(3)

EXAMPLE

7-21


80J23-03E

6) The handle of the CVT fluid dipstick iscolored red or orange for easy identifi-cation. Remove the dipstick, clean it and pushit back in until the cap seats. Pull outthe dipstick and read the fluid level. The fluid level should be between thetwo marks in the “HOT” range on thedipstick.

7) Add just enough specified fluid throughthe dipstick hole to fill the transaxle tothe proper level. It takes only 0.6 liters(1.27 US pt) for CVT to raise the levelfrom “LOW” to “FULL”.

Deterioration Checking or Chang-ing OilSince special procedures, materials andtools are required to check the deteriora-tion of CVT oil or change, it is recom-mended that you trust this job to yourauthorized SUZUKI dealer.

BrakesBrake Fluid

80J004

Check the brake fluid level by looking atthe reservoir in the engine compartment.Check that the fluid level is between the“MAX” and “MIN” lines. If the brake fluidlevel is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the“MAX” line with SAE J1703 or DOT3 brakefluid.

80J104

CAUTIONAfter checking or adding oil, be sureto insert the dipstick securely.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGFailure to follow the guidelines belowcan result in personal injury or seri-ous damage to the brake system.• If the brake fluid in the reservoir

drops below a certain level, thebrake warning light on the instru-ment panel will come on (theengine must be running with theparking brake fully disengaged.)Should the light come on, immedi-ately ask your SUZUKI dealer toinspect the brake system.

• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak inthe brake system which should beinspected by your SUZUKI dealerimmediately.

• Brake fluid can harm your eyes anddamage painted surfaces. Use cau-tion when refilling the reservoir.

(Continued)

or

7-22


80J23-03E

NOTE:With disc brakes, the fluid level can beexpected to gradually fall as the brakepads wear.

Brake Pedal

65D345

With the engine running and the parkingbrake set, measure the distance betweenthe brake pedal and floor carpet when thepedal is depressed with approximately 300N (66 lbs, 30 kg) of force. The minimumdistance required is as specified. Sinceyour vehicle’s brake system is self-adjust-ing, there is no need for pedal adjustment.If the pedal to floor carpet distance as

measured above is less than the minimumdistance required, have your vehicleinspected by your SUZUKI dealer.

NOTE:When measuring the distance between thebrake pedal and floor wall, be sure not toinclude the floor mat or rubber on the floorwall in your measurement.

60G104

WARNING(Continued)• Do not use any fluid other than SAE

J1703 or DOT3 brake fluid. Do notuse reclaimed fluid or fluid that hasbeen stored in old or open contain-ers. It is essential that foreign parti-cles and other liquids are kept outof the brake fluid reservoir.

WARNINGBrake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,do not induce vomiting. Immediatelycontact a poison control center or aphysician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,flush eyes with water and seek medi-cal attention. Wash thoroughly afterhandling. Solution can be poisonousto animals. Keep out of the reach ofchildren and animals.

CAUTIONThe brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the maintenance sched-ule. Have the brake fluid replaced byyour SUZUKI dealer.

Pedal to floor carpet minimum distance“a”

40 mm (1.6 in.)

“a”Floor carpet

7-23


80J23-03E

Parking Brake Lever

60A226

Check the parking brake for proper adjust-ment by counting the number of clicksmade by the ratchet teeth as you slowlypull up on the parking brake lever to thepoint of full engagement. The parkingbrake lever should stop between the speci-fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheelsshould be securely locked. If the parkingbrake is not properly adjusted or thebrakes drag after the lever has been fullyreleased, have the parking brake inspectedand/or adjusted by your SUZUKI dealer.

Steering Wheel

80J005

Check the play of the steering wheel bygently turning it from left to right and mea-suring the distance that it moves beforeyou feel slight resistance. The play shouldbe between the specified values. Checkthat the steering wheel turns easily andsmoothly without rattling by turning it all theway to the right and to the left while drivingvery slowly in an open area. If the amountof free play is outside the specification oryou find anything else to be wrong, aninspection must be performed by yourSUZUKI dealer.

WARNINGIf you experience any of the followingproblems with your vehicle’s brakesystem, have the vehicle inspectedimmediately by your SUZUKI dealer.• Poor braking performance• Uneven braking (brakes not work-

ing uniformly on all wheels.)• Excessive pedal travel• Brake dragging• Excessive noise• (Except ABS equipped vehicle)

Pedal pulsation (pedal pulsateswhen pressed for braking.)

Ratchet tooth specification “b”

4th – 9th

200 N (44 lbs, 20 kg)

“b”

Steering wheel play “c”

0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)

“c”

EXAMPLE

7-24


80J23-03E

Power Steering (if equipped)

54G225

(1) UPPER(2) LOWER

Check the steering box case, vane pumpand hose connections for leaks or damage.

Power Steering FluidCheck the fluid level by looking at the res-ervoir in the engine compartment when thefluid is cold (about room temperature).

Check that the fluid level is between the (1)and (2) lines. If the fluid level is near the (2)line, fill it up to the (1) line with an auto-matic transaxle fluid equivalent to ATFDEXRON®-II (Esso JWS 2326) orDEXRON®-III. Do not overfill.

TiresFor safe operation of your vehicle, it isimportant that the tires be the correcttype and size, in good condition, andproperly inflated. Be sure to follow therequirements and recommendations inthis section.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. The examplebelow shows a typical passenger cartire.

Typical Passenger Car Tire Sidewall

67D027

A. Tire Manufacturer The name of the tire manufactureris shown here.

B. Tire Name/Model The tire name or model is shownhere.

C. Tire Size The tire size code is a combina-tion of letters and numbers usedto define a particular tire’s width,height, aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description. Seethe “Tire Size” explanation later inthis section for more details.

D. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Num-ber The Department of Transportation(DOT) marking indicates that thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.The letters and numbers followingthe DOT marking is the Tire Iden-tification Number (TIN). The TINidentifies the tire manufacturerand plant, tire size, and date thetire was manufactured.

E. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance.Refer to the “Uniform Tire QualityGrading” section for more details.

EXAMPLE

A

HB

G

EF

D

J

IC

7-25


80J23-03E

F. Load Rating Load rating is the maximumweight a tire is designed to sup-port in normal service.

G. Max Inflation Pressure Max inflation pressure is the max-imum inflation pressure a tire isdesigned for.

H. Tire Ply Material These tire markings describe thetype of cord and number of pliesin the sidewall and under thetread.

I. Load Index and Speed Rating The two- or three-digit number isthe tire’s load index, the maximumload a tire can carry at the speedindicated by its speed symbol atthe maximum inflation pressure.The higher the number is, thegreater the load carrying capacity.The letter symbol denotes thespeed at which a tire is designedto be driven for extended periodsof time. (Ratings are listed below.)

*The letters ZR may be used on tireswith a maximum speed capability over149 mph and will always be used ontires with a maximum speed capabilityover 186 mph.

J. M+S Marking This marking indicates the tirehas some mud and snow capabili-ties and is designed for all-seasonuse.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows anexample of a typical passenger car tiresize.

67D028

A. Tire Type This letter code indicates the pri-mary intended use of the tire. Theletter “P” identifies a tire primarilyintended for use on a passengervehicle.

B. Tire Width This three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millime-ters from sidewall to sidewall.

C. Aspect Ratio This two-digit number representsthe tire section height divided bythe tire section width.

Letter Rating Speed Rating

Q 99 mph

R 106 mph

S 112 mph

T 118 mph

U 124 mph

H 130 mph

V 149 mph

W 168 mph*

Y 186 mph*

A B C D E

7-26


80J23-03E

D. Construction Code This letter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction in thetire. The letter “R” means radialply tire construction, the letter “D”means diagonal or bias ply con-struction, and the letter “B” meansbelted-bias ply construction.

E. Rim Diameter This two-digit number is the wheelor rim diameter in inches.

Tire Inflation PressureTire inflation pressure should bechecked when the tire is cold. “Coldtire inflation pressure” is the pressurein a tire that has been driven less than1 mile (1.6 km) or has been standingfor three hours or more.

80JS025

The front and rear tire pressure speci-fications for your vehicle are shownbelow and are listed on the Tire andLoading Information Label, which islocated on the driver’s door lock pillar.The Tire and Loading InformationLabel contains the following informa-tion:

• Seating Capacity• Maximum Allowed Combined

Weight of Occupants and Cargo• Original Tire Size• Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure of Original Tires• Size of Compact Spare Tire• Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure of Compact Spare Tire

WARNING

Your SUZUKI is equipped withtires which are all the same typeand size. This is important toensure proper steering and han-dling of the vehicle. Never mixtires of different size or type onthe four wheels of your vehicle.Mixing tires could cause you tolose control while driving whichmay lead to an accident. The sizeand type of tires used should beonly those approved by SUZUKIMotor Corporation as standard oroptional equipment for your vehi-cle.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures

Front Tires 230 kPa33 psi

Rear Tires 230 kPa33 psi

Compact Spare Tire 420 kPa60 psi

7-27


80J23-03E

NOTE:The tire inflation pressure will changedue to changes in atmospheric pres-sure, temperature or tire temperaturewhen driving. To reduce the chance thatthe low tire pressure warning light willcome on due to normal changes in tem-perature and atmospheric pressure, it isimportant to check and adjust the tirepressures when the tires are cold. Tiresthat appear to be at the specified pres-sure when checked after driving, whenthe tires are warm, could have pressurebelow the specification when the tirescool down. Also, tires that are inflated tothe specified pressure in a warmgarage may have pressure below thespecification when the vehicle is drivenoutside in very cold temperature. If youadjust the tire pressure in a garage thatis warmer than the outside tempera-ture, you should add 1 psi to the recom-mended cold tire inflation pressure forevery 10°F difference between garagetemperature and outside temperature.

Measuring Air PressureUse the following steps to achieveproper tire inflation:1) Identify the recommended tire pres-

sure on the vehicle’s Tire and Load-ing Information Label or in theowner’s manual.

2) Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem.

3) Using a reliable pressure gauge,measure the tire inflation pressureby pressing the tire gauge firmlyonto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. Remember thatinflation pressures should bechecked when the tires are “cold”,meaning before they have beendriven one mile or after sitting forthree hours or more allowing the tireto cool to ambient air temperature.

4) If the air pressure is too high, slowlyrelease the air by pressing on thetire valve stem with the edge of thetire gauge until you reach the cor-rect pressure.

5) If the air pressure is too low, fill thetire with air at a service station untilit reaches the recommended pres-sure.

6) Make sure all tires have the sameair pressure (unless the owner’smanual indicates otherwise).

WARNING

• Air pressures should bechecked when the tires are coldor you may get inaccurate read-ings.

• Check the inflation pressurefrom time to time while inflatingthe tire gradually, until the spec-ified pressure is obtained.

• Never underinflate or overin-flate the tires. Underinflation can causeunusual handling characteristicsor can cause the rim to slip onthe tire bead, resulting in an acci-dent or damage to the tire or rim. Underinflation can also causetires to overheat, leading to tirefailure. Overinflation can cause the tireto burst, resulting in personalinjury. Overinflation can also causeunusual handling characteristicswhich may result in an accident.

7-28


80J23-03E

Tire InspectionInspect your vehicle’s tires at leastonce a month by performing the fol-lowing checks: 1) Measure the air pressure with a tire

gauge. Adjust the pressure if nec-essary. Remember to check thespare tire, too. Refer to the “Mea-suring Air Pressure” section.

54G136

(1) Tread wear indicator(2) Indicator location mark

2) Check that the depth of the treadgroove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06in.). To help you check this, the tireshave molded-in tread wear indica-tors in the grooves. When the indi-cators appear on the tread surface,the remaining depth of the tread is

1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less and thetire should be replaced.

3) Check for abnormal wear, cracksand damage. Any tires with cracksor other damage should bereplaced. If any tires show abnor-mal wear, have them inspected byyour SUZUKI dealer.

4) Check for loose wheel nuts.5) Check that there are no nails,

stones or other objects sticking intothe tires.

WARNING

Hitting curbs and running overrocks can damage tires and affectwheel alignment. Be sure to havetires and wheel alignmentchecked periodically by yourSUZUKI dealer.

WARNING

Your SUZUKI is equipped withtires which are all the same typeand size. This is important toensure proper steering and han-dling of the vehicle. Never mixtires of different size or type onthe four wheels of your vehicle.The size and type of tires usedshould be only those approved bySUZUKI Motor Corporation asstandard or optional equipmentfor your vehicle.

CAUTION

For intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) models, replacing a tirewith one of a different size, orusing different brands among thefour tires can result in damage tothe drive train.

7-29


80J23-03E

Uniform Tire Quality GradingThe U.S. National Highway TrafficSafety Administration has developed agrading system for evaluating the per-formance of passenger car tires. Thefollowing information will help youunderstand the grading system, whichapplies to vehicles sold in the U.S.Consult your SUZUKI dealer or tireretailer for help in choosing the correctreplacement tires for your vehicle.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sectionwidth. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-ture A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwearTraction AA A B CTemperature A B CAll Passenger Car Tires Must ConformTo Federal Safety Requirements inAddition To These Grades

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparativerating based on the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)times as well on the government courseas a tire graded 100. The relative per-formance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, howeverand may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on speci-fied government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

WARNING

Replacing the wheels and tiresequipped on your vehicle withcertain combinations of aftermar-ket wheels and tires can signifi-cantly change the steering andhandling characteristics of yourvehicle. Oversized tires may alsorub against the fender overbumps, causing vehicle damageor tire failure. Therefore, use onlythose wheel and tire combina-tions approved by SUZUKI MotorCorporation as standard oroptional equipment for your vehi-cle. For information regarding thespecified tires, refer to the TireInformation Label located on thedriver’s side door pillar or the“SPECIFICATIONS” section.

CAUTION

Replacing the original tires withtires of a different size may resultin false speedometer or odometerreadings. Check with yourSUZUKI dealer before purchas-ing replacement tires that differ insize from the original tires.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, anddoes not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning or peaktraction characteristics.

7-30


80J23-03E

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high tempera-ture can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corre-sponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Tire Rotation

54G114

To avoid uneven wear of your tires andto prolong their life, rotate the tires asillustrated. Tires should be rotated asrecommended in the periodic mainte-nance schedule. After rotation, adjustfront and rear tire pressures to thespecification listed on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information Label.

WARNING

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire that isproperly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation or excessive loading,either separately or in combina-tion, can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.

WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident.When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brush later,if you need to, to get all the rustor dirt off.

7-31


80J23-03E

Compact Spare Tire (if equipped)

54G115

(1) Wear indicator(2) Indicator location mark

Your vehicle comes equipped with thecompact spare tire. The compactspare is designed to save space inyour storage area, and its lighterweight makes it easier to install if a flattire occurs. It is only intended for tem-porary emergency use, until the con-ventional tire can be repaired orreplaced. The inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire should be checkedat least monthly. Use a quality pocket-type inflation pressure gauge and setat 420 kPa (60 psi). At the same time,check that the tire is stored securely. Ifit is not, tighten it.

Note that two or more compact sparetires should not be used on one vehi-cle simultaneously.

WARNING

The compact spare tire and wheelare intended for temporary emer-gency use only. Continuous useof this spare can result in tire fail-ure and loss of control. Alwaysobserve these precautions whenusing this spare:• Your vehicle will handle differ-

ently with this temporary spare.• Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)

speed.• Replace this spare with a stan-

dard tire and wheel as soon aspossible.

• Use of this spare will reduceground clearance.

• Recommended air pressure forthis spare is 420 kPa (60 psi).

• Do not use tire chains on thecompact spare. If you must usetire chains, rearrange thewheels so standard tires andwheels are fitted to the frontaxle.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)• The compact spare tire has a

much shorter tread life than theconventional tires on your vehi-cle. Replace the tire as soon asthe tread wear indicatorappears.

• When replacing the compacttire, use a replacement tire withthe exact same size and con-struction.

CAUTION

For intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) models, driving with anunderinflated compact spare tireor over 80 km/h (50 mph) whileusing a compact spare tire canresult in damage to the drivetrain.

7-32


80J23-03E

Snow TiresYour vehicle is equipped with all-sea-son tires which are designed for use insummer and most winter conditions.For improved traction in severe winterconditions, SUZUKI recommendsmounting radial snow tires on all fourwheels. Snow tires must be the samesize as the standard tires. Also be sureto use the tires of the same type andbrand on all four wheels of your vehi-cle.

GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOL-OGYAccessory Weight – the combinedweight (in excess of those standarditems which may be replaced) of CVT,power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, radio, andheater, to the extent that these itemsare available as factory-installedequipment (whether installed or not).

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure – the pres-sure in a tire that has been driven lessthan 1 mile or has been standing forthree hours or more.

Curb Weight – the weight of a motorvehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity offuel, oil, and coolant, and, if soequipped, air conditioning and addi-tional weight optional engine.

Intended Outboard Sidewall – (1) thesidewall that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering or bears manu-facturer, brand, and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeper thanthe same molding on the other side-wall of the tire, or (2) the outward fac-ing sidewall of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mountedon a vehicle.

Maximum Inflation Pressure – the max-imum cold inflation pressure a tire isdesigned to support in normal service.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight –the sum of curb weight, accessoryweight, vehicle capacity weight (totalload capacity), and production optionsweight.

Normal Occupant Weight – 68 kilo-grams times the number of occupantsspecified in the second column ofTable 1 (shown below).

Occupant distribution – distribution ofoccupants in a vehicle as specified inthe third column of Table 1 (shownbelow).

Production Options Weight – the com-bined weight of those installed regularproduction options weighing over 2.3kilograms in excess of those standarditems which they replace, not previ-ously considered in curb weight oraccessory weight, including heavyduty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Recommended Inflation Pressure –the cold tire inflation pressure recom-mended by a manufacturer.

Rim – metal support for a tire or tireand tube assembly upon which the tirebeads are seated.

7-33


80J23-03E

Vehicle Capacity Weight – the ratedcargo and luggage load plus 68 kilo-grams (150 lbs) times the vehicle’sdesignated seating capacity.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire –the load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehi-cle weight and dividing by two.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire – theload on an individual tire that is deter-mined by distributing to each axle itsshare of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1shown below) and dividing by 2.

TABLE 1 – Occupant Loading andDistribution For Vehicle NormalLoad For Various Designated Seat-ing Capacities

Vehicle LoadingYour vehicle was designed for specificload capacities. The load capacities ofyour vehicle are indicated by theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR,front and rear), and the total loadcapacity, the seating capacity, and thecargo load capacity. The GVWR andGAWR (front and rear) are listed onthe Safety Certification Label which islocated below the driver’s side doorlatch striker. The total load capacityand seating capacity are listed on theTire and Loading Information Labelwhich is located below the Safety Cer-tification Label. The cargo load capac-ity can be determined as describedbelow.

Cargo Load Capacity – Maximumweight of cargo and luggage that thevehicle can safely carry. Cargo loadcapacity is the difference between thetotal load capacity of the vehicle andthe total combined weight of all vehicleoccupants. Refer to “Steps for Deter-mining Correct Load Limit” for detailson how to determine cargo loadcapacity.

GVWR – Maximum permissible overallweight of the fully loaded vehicle(including all the occupants, accesso-ries and cargo plus the trailer tongueweight if towing a trailer).

GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximumpermissible weight on an individualaxle.

Seating Capacity – Maximum numberof occupants the vehicle is designed tocarry.

NOTE:Even though the number of occupantsis within the seating capacity, you stillmust make sure that you do notexceed the total load capacity of thevehicle.

Total Load Capacity – Maximum per-missible weight a vehicle can carryincluding the weight of all the occu-pants, accessories, cargo, plus trailertongue weight (if towing a trailer).

The weight of any accessories alreadyinstalled on your vehicle at the time ofpurchase, or that you or the dealerinstall after purchase, must be sub-tracted from the total load capacity todetermine how much capacity remainsavailable for occupants, cargo, andtrailer tongue weight (if towing a

Designated seating capacity, number of occupants

Vehicle nor-mal load, number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a nor-mally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 32 in front,

1 in second seat

7-34


80J23-03E

trailer). Contact your dealer for furtherinformation.

Actual weight of the loaded vehicleand actual loads at the front and rearaxles can only be determined byweighing the vehicle using a vehiclescale. To measure the weight andload, try making your vehicle to a high-way weighing station, shipping com-pany or inspection station for trucks,etc. Compare these weights to theGVWR and GAWR (front and rear)listed on the Safety Certification Label.If the gross vehicle weight or the loadon either axle exceeds these ratings,you must remove enough weight tobring the load down to the ratedcapacity.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kgor XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s plac-ard.

2) Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150 lb passen-gers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 – 750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs).

5) Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING

Never overload your vehicle. Over-loading your vehicle can causedamage to your tires and lead topoor steering and braking whichcan result in an accident. Thegross vehicle weight (sum of theweights of the loaded vehicle,driver and passengers) mustnever exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) listed onthe Safety Certification Label. Inaddition, never distribute a load sothat the weight on either the frontor rear axle exceeds the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Safety Certification Label.

WARNING

• Always distribute cargo evenly.• To avoid personal injury or

damage to your vehicle, alwayssecure cargo to prevent it fromshifting if the vehicle movessuddenly.

• Place heavier objects on thefloor and as far forward in thecargo area as possible. Neverpile cargo higher than the top ofthe seatbacks.

7-35


80J23-03E

Vehicle Loading ExampleAs an example, suppose that the Tireand Loading Information label on yourvehicle indicates that your vehicle’stotal load capacity is 950 lbs. If youwere to drive your vehicle with onepassenger, and the total combinedweight of you and your passenger was350 lbs, then the cargo and luggagecapacity of your vehicle would be 600lbs (950 – 350 = 600 lbs).If you later added 2 more passengers,having a combined weight of 325 lbs,the cargo and luggage capacity ofyour vehicle would be reduced from600 lbs to 275 lbs (600 – 325 = 275lbs). As you can see, as the numberand combined weight of vehicle occu-pants increase, the vehicle’s cargoand luggage capacity decreases.Suppose again, that you were to takea trip in your vehicle with the samethree passengers described above,and you decided to tow a trailer havinga trailer tongue weight of 75 lbs. Thecargo and luggage capacity would bereduced again, to 200 lbs (275 – 75 =200 lbs).

Determining Compatibility of Tireand Vehicle Load LimitsThe tires on your vehicle, when theyare inflated to the recommended tireinflation pressure, have a load-carry-ing capacity that is greater than theload that will be on the tires when thevehicle is at its GVWR or GAWR limit.Never use replacement tires that havea load-carrying capacity less than theoriginal tires on your vehicle. Tire load-carrying capacity information ismolded into the tire sidewall typicallyshown as “Max. Load”. Use of replace-ment tires with a lower load-carryingcapacity than the original tires, or fail-ure to keep the tires inflated to recom-mended tire pressure, may reduce theGVWR or GAWR limit of your vehicle.

NOTE:Use of replacement tires with a higherload-carrying capacity than the origi-nal tires, or using a tire inflation pres-sure higher than the recommendedtire inflation pressure, will not increasethe GVWR or GAWR limit of your vehi-cle.

Battery

60A269

WARNINGBatteries produce flammable hydro-gen gas. Keep flames and sparksaway from the battery or an explosionmay occur. Never smoke when work-ing near the battery.

WARNINGWhen checking or servicing the bat-tery, disconnect the negative cable.Be careful not to cause a short circuitby allowing metal objects to contactthe battery posts and the vehicle atthe same time.

EXAMPLE

7-36


80J23-03E

Your vehicle is equipped with a battery thatrequires infrequent maintenance. You willnever have to add water. You should, how-ever, periodically check the battery, batteryterminals and battery hold-down bracketfor corrosion. Remove corrosion using astiff brush and ammonia mixed with water,or baking soda mixed with water. Afterremoving corrosion, rinse with clean water.

The test indicator on the top of the batteryprovides information on the condition ofthe battery.

If your vehicle is not going to be driven fora month or longer, disconnect the cablefrom the negative terminal of the battery tohelp prevent discharge.

FusesYour vehicle has three types of fuses, asdescribed below:

Main Fuse – The main fuse takes currentdirectly from the battery.

Primary Fuses – These fuses are betweenthe main fuse and individual fuses, and arefor electrical load groups.

Individual Fuses – These fuses are for indi-vidual electrical circuits.

For details on protected circuits, refer tothe “Fuses and Protected Circuits” sectionin this manual.

To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro-vided in the fuse box.

63J095

Fuses in the Engine Compartment

80J051

80J052

WARNINGTo avoid harm to yourself or damageto your vehicle or battery, follow thejump starting instructions in the“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section ofthis manual if it is necessary to jumpstart your vehicle.

WARNINGBattery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after han-dling.

(1)

(2) (3)

(28)

(27)(26)(25)

(6) (7) (9) (11)

(15) (16) (17) (18) (19)

(24)

(8)(4) (5) (10)

(22)(21)

(23)

(20)

(12) (13) (14)

(30)

(29)

7-37


80J23-03E

The main fuse, primary fuses and some ofthe individual fuses are located in theengine compartment. If the main fuseblows, no electrical component will func-tion. If a primary fuse blows, no electricalcomponent in the corresponding loadgroup will function. When replacing themain fuse, a primary fuse or an individualfuse, use a genuine SUZUKI replacement. To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro-vided in the fuse box. The amperage ofeach fuse is shown in the back of the fusebox cover.

60A243

NOTE:Make sure that the fuse box always carriesspare fuses.

MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE

(1) 80A All electric load

(2) 50A Power window, Ignition, Wiper, Starter

(3) 50ATail light, Rear defogger, Door lock, Hazard/Horn, Dome

(4) – Blank

(5) – Blank

(6) 15A Head light (Right) fuse

(7) 15A Head light (Left) fuse

(8) 20A Front fog light fuse

(9) – Blank

(10) 40A ABS motor fuse

(11) 30A Radiator fan fuse

(12) 30A ABS solenoid fuse

(13) 30A Starting motor fuse

(14) 50A Ignition switch fuse

(15) 30A Blower fan fuse

(16) 20A Air compressor fuse

(17) 15A Throttle motor fuse

(18) 15A Automatic transaxle fuse

(19) 15A Fuel injection fuse

(20) – Automatic transaxle relay

(21) – Air compressor relay

(22) – Fuel pump relay

(23) – Condenser fan relay

(24) – Front fog light relay

(25) – Throttle motor relay

(26) – FI MAIN relay

(27) – Starting motor relay

(28) – Radiator fan relay

(29) – Radiator fan relay 2

(30) – Radiator fan relay 3 WARNINGIf the main fuse or a primary fuseblows, be sure to have your vehicleinspected by an authorized SUZUKIdealer. Always use a genuine SUZUKIreplacement. Never use a substitutesuch as a wire even for a temporaryfix, or extensive electrical damageand a fire can result.

BLOWN

OK

7-38


80J23-03E

Fuses under the Dash Board

79J093

SX4

80J053

SX4 SEDAN

80JC003

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)

(7)


(1) 15A Rear wiper

(2) 15A Ignition coil

(3) 10A Back-up light

(4) 10A Meter

(5) 15A Accessory

(6) 15A Accessory 2

(7) 30A Power window

(8) 30A Wiper

(9) 10A IG1 SIG

(10) 15A Air bag

(11) 10A Anti-lock brake system

(12) 15A 4WD

(13) 10A Stop light

(14) 20A Door lock

(15) 10A Rear fog light

(16) 10A ST SIG

(17) 15A Seat heater

(18) 10A IG 2 SIG

(19) 10A Tail light

(20) 15A Dome

(21) 30A Rear defogger

(22) 15A Horn / Hazard

(23) – Blank


(1) 15A Rear wiper

(2) 15A Ignition coil

(3) 10A Back-up light

(4) 10A Meter

(5) 15A Accessory

(6) 15A Accessory 2

(7) 30A Power window

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)

(21)

(24)

(14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (22) (23)

(7)

7-39


80J23-03E

The fuses are also located under thedriver’s side of the dashboard. Remove thefuse box cover by pulling it off. The amper-age of each fuse is shown on the top of thefuse box cover.

65D046

Headlight AimingSince special procedures are required, werecommend you take your vehicle to yourSUZUKI dealer for headlight alignment.

(8) 30A Wiper

(9) 10A IG1 SIG

(10) 15A Air bag

(11) 10A Anti-lock brake system

(12) – Blank

(13) 10A Stop light

(14) 20A Door lock

(15) 10A Rear fog light

(16) 10A ST SIG

(17) 15A Seat heater

(18) 10A IG 2 SIG

(19) 10A Tail light

(20) 15A Dome


(22) 15A Horn / Hazard

(23) – Blank


WARNINGAlways be sure to replace a blownfuse with a fuse of the correct amper-age. Never use a substitute such asaluminum foil or wire to replace ablown fuse. If you replace a fuse andthe new one blows in a short periodof time, you may have a major electri-cal problem. Have your vehicleinspected immediately by yourSUZUKI dealer.

BLOWNOK

7-40


80J23-03E

Bulb Replacement

NOTE:If it is difficult to replace headlight bulbs orposition light bulbs due to under-hoodcomponents trust this job to your dealer.

Center Interior Light (if equipped)

60G115

Pull down the lens by using a flat bladescrewdriver covered with a soft cloth asshown. To install it, simply push it back in.

The bulb can be removed by simply pullingit out. When replacing the bulb, make surethat the contact springs are holding thebulb securely.

Spot light

80JM068

Pull down the lens by using a flat bladescrewdriver covered with a soft cloth asshown. To install it, simply push it back in.

WARNING• Light bulbs can be hot enough to

burn your finger right after beingturned off. This is true especiallyfor halogen headlight bulbs.Replace the bulbs after theybecome cool enough.

• The headlight bulbs are filled withpressurized halogen gas. They canburst and injure you if they are hitor dropped. Handle them carefully.

CAUTIONThe oils from your skin may cause ahalogen bulb to overheat and burstwhen the lights are on. Grasp a newbulb with a clean cloth.

CAUTIONFrequent replacement of a bulb indi-cates the need for an inspection ofthe electrical system. This should becarried out by your SUZUKI dealer.

7-41


80J23-03E

Headlights

80J2084

Open the engine food. Disconnect the cou-pler (1). Then remove the socket cover (2)and replace the bulb. Install a new bulb inthe reverse order of removal.

Other General LightsBulb holder

54G123

(1) Removal(2) Installation

To remove a bulb holder from a light hous-ing, turn the holder counterclockwise andpull it out. To install the holder, push theholder in and turn it clockwise.

Bulb

54G124

(3) Removal(4) Installation

There are two types of bulb, “Full glasstype” (1) and “Glass/metal type” (2).

To remove and install a full glass type bulb(1), simply pull out or push in the bulb.

To remove a glass metal type bulb (2) froma bulb holder, push in the bulb and turn itcounterclockwise. To install a new bulb,push it in and turn it clockwise.

You can access the individual bulb or bulbholders as follows.

(1)

(2)

(1)

(1)

(2)

(2)

EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

EXAMPLE

7-42


80J23-03E

Front turn signal light (1)Front position light (2)

80JM123

Front fog light (if equipped)

1) Start the engine. Turn the steeringwheel to the opposite side of the replac-ing fog light to replace the bulb easily.Then turn off the engine.

80JM114

2) Insert a flat blade screwdriver into thehole (2) and remove the clips (1) bytwist the driver as shown in the illustra-tion.

80JM115

3) Remove the bolts (3).

(1) (2)

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

(3)

EXAMPLE

7-43


80J23-03E

SX4

80JM116

4) Open the fender cover. Disconnect thecoupler by pushing the lock release. Pinch both side of the clips (4) and (5),and push them in.

80JM117

5) Remove the front fog light. Turn thebulb holder counterclockwise andremove it.

SX4 SEDAN

80JM071

4) Open the fender cover. Disconnect thecoupler with pushing the lock release.Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.

Rear combination light (tail, stop, turn signal, etc.)

SX4

80JM131

SX4 SEDAN

80JM072

(4)

(5)

EXAMPLE

(2)

(1)

7-44


80J23-03E

To open the trim (1), insert a flat bladescrewdriver between the trim and the clips(2) and remove the clips by twist the driveras shown in the illustration.

80JM073

License plate light

SX4

80JM079

SX4 SEDAN

80JM074

To open the trim (1), insert a flat bladescrewdriver into the hole (3) and removethe clips (2) by twist the driver as shown inthe illustration.

80JM075

(3)(1)

(2)

7-45


80J23-03E

Luggage compartment light (SX4)

79J015

Trunk room light (SX4 SEDAN)

56KN004

High-mount stop light (if equipped)

SX4

80J100

To remove a high-mounted stop light hous-ing the following procedure:

1) Open the tailgate, and remove the nuts(1) as shown in the illustration.

63J127

2) Close the tailgate. Remove a high-mounted stop light housing (2) from thetailgate.

(1)

(2)

7-46


80J23-03E

80JM076

3) Pushing the unguiform prongs (3)toward inside and remove the bulbholder (4).

4) Replace the bulbs. To install a high-mounted stop lighthousing in the reverse order of removal.

SX4 SEDAN

80JM132

To remove the high-mounted stop lighthousing, pinch both side of the clip (1) andpush it in.

Wiper Blades

80G083

If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-aged, or make streaks when wiping,replace the wiper blades.

To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-cedures below.

NOTE:Some wiper blades may be different fromthe ones described here depending onvehicle specifications. If so, consult yourSUZUKI dealer for proper replacementmethod.

(3)(3) (4)

(1)

CAUTIONTo avoid scratching or breaking thewindow, do not let the wiper armstrike the window while replacing thewiper blade.

7-47


80J23-03E

For windshield wipers and some rearwipers:

70G119

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-dow.

NOTE:When raising both of the front wiper arms,pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first.When returning the wiper arms, lower thepassenger’s side wiper arm first. Other-wise, the wiper arms may interfere witheach other.

52D102

2) Squeeze lock lever (1) towards wiperarm (2) and remove the wiper framefrom the arm as shown.

60A260

3) Pull the locked end of the wiper bladefirmly to unlock the blade and slide theblade out as shown.

7-48


80J23-03E

52D124

(3) Retainer

4) If the new blade is provided without thetwo metal retainers, move them fromthe old blade to the new one.

Installation

52D125

(4) Locked end

5) Install the new blade in the reverseorder of removal, with the locked endpositioned toward the wiper arm. Makesure the blade is properly retained byall the hooks. Grasp the blade near thelocked end and pull in the direction ofthe arrows to lock the end into place.

6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, makingsure that the lock lever is snappedsecurely into the arm.

To remove some types of rear wiperframe from the wiper arm:1) Hold the arm away from the window.

80G146

2) Remove the wiper frame from the armas shown.

7-49


80J23-03E

3) When reinstalling wiper frame to arm,install the wiper frame in the reverseorder of removal.

To remove and install some types ofrear wiper blade from and to the wiperframe.

Removal

52D104

1) Flex the locked end of blade (3) awayfrom retainer (4) to unlock it and slidethe blade out as shown.

Installation

60A265

2) Install the new blade in the reverseorder of removal. Make sure that theblade is properly retained by all thehooks and the end is locked in place.

To remove and install some types ofrear wiper blade from and to the wiperframe.

65D151

1) Flex the ends of blade and frame, andslide the blade out as shown.But do not flex the frame end more thannecessary.If you do, it can break off.

2) Install the new blade in the reverseorder of removal. Make sure that theblade is properly retained by all thehooks and both ends are in place.

7-50


80J23-03E

Windshield Washer Fluid

80JM078

80J008

Check that there is washer fluid in the tankby looking at the washer fluid level gaugewhich is attached to the cap of the washerfluid tank. If the fluid level is near “E” mark,refill it.Use a good quality windshield washerfluid, diluted with water as necessary.

Air Conditioning SystemIf you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oiland helps protect the internal components.

(or opposite side)

WARNINGDo not use “anti-freeze” solution inthe windshield washer reservoir. Thiscan severely impair visibility whensprayed on the windshield, and alsodamage your vehicle’s paint.

CAUTIONDamage may result if the washermotor is operated with no fluid in thewasher tank.

7-51


80J23-03E

MEMO

EMERGENCY SERVICE

8

80J23-03E

60G411

EMERGENCY SERVICETire Changing Tool ............................................................. 8-1Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 8-2Changing Wheels ................................................................ 8-4Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 8-5Towing a Disabled Vehicle ................................................. 8-6If the Starter Does Not Operate .......................................... 8-6If the Engine is Flooded ...................................................... 8-7If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 8-7

8-1

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J23-03E

Tire Changing ToolSX4

80JC014

SX4 SEDAN

80JC045

The jack, wheel brace, jack handle arestowed in the luggage compartment.

80J048

To remove the spare tire, turn its bolt (1)counterclockwise and remove it.

79J085

To remove the jack, turn its shaft counter-clockwise and pull the jack out of the stor-age bracket.

SX4

79J086

SX4 SEDAN

80JC015

To stow the jack, place it in the storagebracket and turn the shaft clockwise untilthe jack is securely held in place.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

Vehicle Loading: 11

8-2

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J23-03E

Jacking Instructions

75F062

1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift

into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has a CVT,or shift into “R” (Reverse) if your vehiclehas a manual transaxle.

3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher ifyour vehicle is near traffic.

4) Block the front and rear of the wheeldiagonally opposite of the wheel beinglifted.

5) Place the spare wheel near the wheelbeing lifted as shown in the illustrationin case that the jack slips.

54G253

WARNINGThe jack should be used only tochange wheels. It is important to readthe jacking instructions in this sec-tion before attempting to use thejack.

WARNINGAfter using the jack, jack handle andwheel wrench, be sure to stow themsecurely or they can cause injury ifan accident occurs.

WARNING• Be sure to shift into “P” (Park) for a

CVT vehicle, or into “R” (Reverse)for a manual transaxle vehiclewhen you jack up the vehicle.

• Never jack up the vehicle with thetransaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-wise, an unstable jack may causean accident.

Trailer Towing: 5, 11, 13Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13

8-3

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J23-03E

80J085

6) Position the jack at an angle as shownin the illustration and raise the jack byturning the jack handle clockwise untilthe jack-head groove fits around thejacking bar beneath the vehicle body.

7) Continue to raise the jack slowly andsmoothly until the tire clears theground. Do not raise the vehicle morethan necessary.

Front wheel

80J086

Rear wheel

80J087

front

WARNING• Use the jack only to change wheels

on level, hard ground.• Never jack up the vehicle on an

inclined surface.• Never raise the vehicle with the

jack in a location other than thespecified jacking point (shown inthe illustration) near the wheel tobe changed.

• Make sure that the jack is raised atleast 51 mm (2 inches) before itcontacts the flange. Use of the jackwhen it is within 51 mm (2 inches)of being fully collapsed may resultin failure of the jack.

• Never get under the vehicle when itis supported by the jack.

• Never run the engine when thevehicle is supported by the jackand never allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13

8-4

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J23-03E

Changing WheelsTo change a wheel, use the following pro-cedure:1) Remove the jack, tools and spare wheel

from the vehicle.2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel

nuts.3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking

instructions in this section).

4) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.5) Before installing the new wheel, clean

any mud or dirt off from the surface ofthe wheel and hub with a clean cloth.Clean the hub carefully; it may be hotfrom driving.

6) Install the new wheel and replace thewheel nuts with their cone shaped endfacing the wheel. Tighten each nutsnugly by hand until the wheel issecurely seated on the hub.

81A057

7) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nutsin a crisscross fashion with a wrench asshown in the illustration.

Full Wheel Cover (if equipped)

60G309

(1) or (2) Flat end tool

Your vehicle includes two tools, a wheelbrace and a jack crank, one of which has aflat end.Use the tool with the flat end to remove thefull wheel cap, as shown above.

54G117

When installing the cover, make sure that itis positioned so that it does not cover orfoul the air valve.

WARNING• Be sure to shift into “P” (Park) in

CVT, or shift into “R” (Reverse) inmanual transaxle when you jack upthe vehicle.

• Never jack up the vehicle with thetransaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-wise, unstable jack may cause anaccident.

Wheel tightening torque

85 Nm (61.5 lb-ft, 8.5 kg-m)

WARNINGUse genuine wheel nuts and tightenthem to the specified torque as soonas possible after changing wheels.Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts may comeloose or fall off, which can result inan accident. If you do not have atorque wrench, have the wheel nuttorque checked by an authorizedSUZUKI dealer.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13

8-5

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J23-03E

Jump Starting Instructions

When jump starting your vehicle, usethe following procedure:

60A269

1) Use only a 12-volt battery to jump startyour vehicle. Position the good 12-voltbattery close to your vehicle so that thejumper cables will reach both batteries.When using a battery installed onanother vehicle, DO NOT LET THEVEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parkingbrakes fully on both vehicles.

2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, exceptthose necessary for safety reasons (forexample, headlights or hazard lights).

54G079

3) Make jumper cable connections as fol-lows:1. Connect one end of the first jumper

cable to the positive (+) terminal ofthe discharged battery (1).

2. Connect the other end to the positive(+) terminal of the booster battery(2).

3. Connect one end of the secondjumper cable to the negative (–) ter-minal of the booster battery (2).

4. Make the final connection to anunpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.engine hook (3)) of the engine of thevehicle with the discharged battery(1).

WARNING• Never attempt to jump start your

vehicle if the battery appears to befrozen. Batteries in this conditionmay explode or rupture if jumpstarting is attempted.

• When making jumper cable con-nections, be certain that yourhands and the jumper cablesremain clear from pulleys, belts orfans.

• Batteries produce flammablehydrogen gas. Keep flames andsparks away from the battery or anexplosion may occur. Never smokewhen working near the battery.

• If the booster battery you use forjump starting is installed in anothervehicle, make sure the two vehiclesare not touching each other.

• If your battery discharges repeat-edly, for no apparent reason, haveyour vehicle inspected by an autho-rized SUZUKI dealer.

• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-age to your vehicle or battery, fol-low the jump starting instructionsbelow precisely and in order. If youare in doubt, call for qualified roadservice.

CAUTIONYour vehicle should not be started bypushing or towing. This startingmethod could result in permanentdamage to the catalytic converter.Use jumper cables to start a vehiclewith a weak or run-down battery.

12V BATTERY (1)

(3)

(2)EXAMPLE

8-6

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J23-03E

4) If the booster battery you are using isinstalled on another vehicle, start theengine of the vehicle with the boosterbattery. Run the engine at moderatespeed.

5) Start the engine of the vehicle with thedischarged battery.

6) Remove the jumper cables in the exactreverse order in which you connectedthem.

Towing a Disabled VehicleEmergency TowingIf your vehicle is disabled, it may be towedby a tow truck using one of the followingmethods:1) Tow the vehicle with two wheels lifted

by the tow truck and the other twowheels on a towing dolly.

2) Use the appropriate towing methodspecified for your vehicle in the “TowingYour Vehicle (recreational towing)” sec-tion, but with the wheels lifted by thetow truck instead of on a towing dolly.Be sure to carefully follow the specificinstructions provided in the “TowingYour Vehicle (recreational towing)” sec-tion.

If the Starter Does Not Operate1) Try turning the ignition switch to the

“START” position with the headlightsturned on to determine the battery con-dition. If the headlights go excessivelydim or go off, it usually means thateither the battery has run down or bat-tery terminal contact is poor. Rechargethe battery or correct battery terminalcontact if necessary.

2) If the headlights remain bright, checkthe fuses. If the reason for failure of thestarter is not obvious, there may be amajor electrical problem. Have the vehi-cle inspected by your authorizedSUZUKI dealer.

WARNINGNever connect the jumper cabledirectly to the negative (–) terminal ofthe discharged battery, or an explo-sion may occur.

CAUTIONIf vehicle damage (such as steeringor drivetrain damage, etc.) preventsnormal use of the towing proceduresfor your vehicle described in the“Towing Your Vehicle (recreationaltowing)” section, have your vehicletowed with two wheels lifted by thetow truck and the other two wheelson a towing dolly.

8-7

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J23-03E

If the Engine is FloodedIf the engine is flooded with gasoline, itmay be hard to start. If this happens, pressthe accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and hold it there while cranking theengine. (Do not operate the starter motorfor more than 15 seconds).

If the Engine OverheatsThe engine could overheat temporarilyunder severe driving conditions. If theengine coolant temperature gauge indi-cates overheating during driving:

1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and

park.3) Let the engine run at normal idle speed

for a few minutes until the indicator iswithin the normal, acceptable tempera-ture range shown by the white bandbetween “H” and “C”.

If the temperature indication does notcome down to within the normal, accept-able range:

1) Turn off the engine and check that thewater pump belt and pulleys are notdamaged or slipping. If any abnormalityis found, correct it.

2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”line, look for leaks at the radiator, waterpump and radiator and heater hoses. Ifyou locate any leaks that may havecaused the overheating, do not run theengine until these problems have beencorrected.

3) If you do not find a leak, carefully addcoolant to the reservoir and then theradiator, if necessary. (Refer to “EngineCoolant” in the “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section.)

WARNINGIf you see or hear escaping steam,stop the vehicle in a safe place andimmediately turn off the engine to letit cool. Do not open the hood whensteam is present. When the steamcan no longer be seen or heard, openthe hood to see if the coolant is stillboiling. If it is, you must wait until itstops boiling before you proceed.Also, be careful not to touch hotengine parts (radiator, water hoses,engine etc.).

8-8

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J23-03E

65D614

WARNING• It is hazardous to remove the radia-

tor cap when the water temperatureis high, because scalding fluid andsteam may be blown out underpressure. The cap should only betaken off when the coolant temper-ature has lowered.

• To prevent personal injury, keephands, tools and clothing awayfrom the engine cooling fan and air-conditioner fan (if equipped). Theseelectric fans can automatically turnon without warning.

8-9

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J23-03E

MEMO

APPEARANCE CARE

9

80J23-03E

60G412

APPEARANCE CARECorrosion Prevention ......................................................... 9-1Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 9-3

9-1

APPEARANCE CARE

80J23-03E

Corrosion PreventionIt is important to take good care of yourvehicle to protect it from corrosion.

Listed below are instructions for how tomaintain your vehicle to prevent corrosion. Please read and follow these instructionscarefully.

Important Information About CorrosionCommon causes of corrosion1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, moisture

or chemicals in hard-to-reach areas ofthe vehicle underbody or frame.

2) Chipping, scratches and any damage totreated or painted metal surfacesresulting from minor accidents orimpact from stones and gravel.

Environmental conditions which accel-erate corrosion1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea

air or industrial pollution will all acceler-ate the corrosion of metal.

2) High humidity will increase the rate ofcorrosion particularly when the temper-ature range is just above the freezingpoint.

3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehiclefor an extended period of time may pro-mote corrosion even though other bodysections may be completely dry.

4) High temperatures will cause an accel-erated rate of corrosion to parts of the

vehicle which are not well ventilated topermit quick drying.

52D151

This information illustrates the necessity ofkeeping your vehicle (particularly theunderbody) as clean and dry as possible. Itis equally important to repair any damageto the paint or protective coatings as soonas possible.

How to Help Prevent CorrosionWash your vehicle frequentlyThe best way to preserve the finish on yourvehicle and to help avoid corrosion is tokeep it clean with frequent washing.

Wash your vehicle at least once during thewinter and once immediately after the win-ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly theunderside, as clean and dry as possible.

If you frequently drive on salted roads, yourvehicle should be washed at least once amonth during the winter. If you live near theocean, your vehicle should be washed atleast once a month throughout the year.

For washing instructions, refer to the “Vehi-cle Cleaning” section.

Remove foreign material depositsForeign material such as salts, chemicals,road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings andindustrial fall-out may damage the finish ofyour vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.Remove these types of deposits as quicklyas possible. If these deposits are difficult towash off, an additional cleaner may berequired. Be sure that any cleaner you useis not harmful to painted surfaces and isspecifically intended for your purposes.Follow the manufacturer’s directions whenusing these special cleaners.

Repair finish damageCarefully examine your vehicle for damageto the painted surfaces, especially if it isused off-road. Should you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them upimmediately to prevent corrosion fromstarting. If the chips or scratches havegone through to the bare metal, have aqualified body shop make the repair.

9-2

APPEARANCE CARE

80J23-03E

Keep passenger and cargo compart-ments cleanMoisture, dirt or mud can accumulateunder the floor mats and may cause corro-sion. Occasionally, check under thesemats to ensure that this area is clean anddry. More frequent checks are necessary ifthe vehicle is used off road or in wetweather.

Certain cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-rosive by nature. These products shouldbe transported in sealed containers. If aspill or leak does occur, clean and dry thearea immediately.

Use the body trimThe use of the body trim will help protectyour vehicle, especially if you frequentlydrive on gravel or salted roads. The fittingsfor such guards should also be corrosionresistant. Please check with your autho-rized SUZUKI dealer for information onthese guards.

Store your vehicle in a dry, well-venti-lated areaDo not park your vehicle in a damp, poorlyventilated area. If you often wash yourvehicle in the garage or if you frequentlydrive it in when wet, your garage may bedamp. The high humidity in the garagemay cause or accelerate corrosion. A wetvehicle may corrode even in a heatedgarage if the ventilation is poor.

Cover your vehicle

50G203

If you cannot regularly park your vehicle ina garage, we recommend you use a vehi-cle cover. Years of exposure to midday suncan cause the colors in paint, plastic partsand fabrics to fade. Covering your vehiclewith a high-quality, “breathable” vehiclecover can help protect the finish from theharmful UV rays in sunlight, and canreduce the amount of dust and air pollutionreaching the surface. Your SUZUKI dealercan help you select the right cover for yourvehicle.

WARNINGDo not apply additional undercoatingor rust preventive coating on oraround exhaust system componentssuch as the catalytic converter,exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could bestarted if the undercoating substancebecomes overheated.

Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10

9-3

APPEARANCE CARE

80J23-03E

Vehicle Cleaning

76G044S

Cleaning InteriorVinyl upholsteryPrepare a solution of soap or mild deter-gent mixed with warm water. Apply thesolution to the vinyl with a sponge or softcloth and let it soak for a few minutes toloosen dirt. Rub the surface with a clean,

damp cloth to remove dirt and the soapsolution. If some dirt still remains on thesurface, repeat this procedure.

Fabric upholsteryRemove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.Using a mild soap solution, rub stainedareas with a clean damp cloth. To removesoap, rub the areas again with a clothdampened with water. Repeat this until thestain is removed, or use a commercial fab-ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use afabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-facturer’s instructions and precautions.

Leather upholsteryRemove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution,wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth.To remove soap, wipe the areas again witha soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe theareas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat thisuntil the dirt or stain is removed, or use acommercial leather cleaner for tougher dirtor stains. If you use a leather cleaner, care-fully follow the manufacture’s instructionsand precautions. Do not use solvent typecleaners or abrasive cleaners.

Seat beltsClean seat belts with a mild soap andwater. Do not use bleach or dye on thebelts. They may weaken the fabric in thebelts.

Vinyl floor matsOrdinary dirt can be removed from vinylwith water or mild soap. Use a brush tohelp loosen dirt. After dirt is loosened,rinse the mat thoroughly with water anddry it in the shade.

CarpetsRemove dirt and soil as much as possiblewith a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soapsolution, rub stained areas with a cleandamp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areasagain with a cloth dampened with water.Repeat this until the stain is removed, oruse a commercial carpet cleaner fortougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions and precautions.

Cleaning the ExteriorWARNING

When cleaning the interior or exteriorof the vehicle, NEVER USE flammablesolvents such lacquer thinners, gas-oline, benzene or cleaning materialssuch as bleaches and strong house-hold detergents. The materials couldcause personal injury or damage tothe vehicle.

CAUTIONIt is important that your vehicle bekept clean and free from dirt. Failureto keep your vehicle clean may resultin fading of the paint or corrosion tovarious parts of the vehicle body.

Periodic Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10

9-4

APPEARANCE CARE

80J23-03E

Washing

When washing the vehicle, follow theinstructions below:

1) Flush the underside of body and wheelhousings with pressurized water toremove mud and debris. Use plenty ofwater.

2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.Remove dirt and mud from the bodyexterior with running water. You mayuse a soft sponge or brush. Do not usehard materials which can scratch thepaint or plastic. Remember that theheadlight covers or lenses are made ofplastic in many cases.

3) Wash the entire exterior with a milddetergent or car wash soap using asponge or soft cloth. The sponge orcloth should be frequently soaked in thesoap solution.

4) Once the dirt has been completelyremoved, rinse off the detergent withrunning water.

5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle bodywith a wet chamois or cloth and allow itto dry in the shade.

6) Check carefully for damage to paintedsurfaces. If there is any damage,“touch-up” the damage following theprocedure below:1. Clean all damaged spots and allow

them to dry.2. Stir the paint and “touch-up” the

damaged spots lightly using a smallbrush.

3. Allow the paint to dry completely.

WARNING• Never attempt to wash and wax

your vehicle with the engine run-ning.

• When cleaning the underside of thebody and fender, where there maybe sharp-edged parts, you shouldwear gloves and a long-sleevedshirt to protect your hands andarms from being cut.

• After washing your vehicle, care-fully test the brakes before drivingto make sure they have maintainedtheir normal effectiveness.

CAUTION• When washing the vehicle, avoid

directing steam or hot water ofmore than 80°C (176°F) on plasticparts.

• To avoid damaging engine compo-nents, do not use pressurizedwater in the engine compartment.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the paint or plas-tic surface, do not wipe the dirt offwithout ample water. Be sure to fol-low above procedure.

CAUTIONWhen using a commercial car washproduct, observe the cautions speci-fied by the manufacturer. Never usestrong household detergents orsoaps.

CAUTIONIf you use an automatic car wash,make sure that your vehicle’s bodyparts, such as spoilers, cannot bedamaged. If you are in doubt, consultthe car wash operator for advice.

Periodic Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10

9-5

APPEARANCE CARE

80J23-03E

Waxing

60B211S

After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-ishing are recommended to further protectand beautify the paint.

• Only use waxes and polishes of goodquality.

• When using waxes and polishes,observe the precautions specified by themanufacturers.

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Condi-tions: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10

GENERAL INFORMATION

10

80J23-03E

54G072

GENERAL INFORMATIONIdentification Numbers ....................................................... 10-1Safety Certification Label ................................................... 10-2Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ........................... 10-2Warranties ............................................................................ 10-2On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data Recorders ............................................................................ 10-3Reporting Safety Defects ................................................... 10-4

10-1

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J23-03E

Identification NumbersVehicle Identification Number

80JC090

79J019

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)may be found in the location shown in theabove illustrations. This number is used toregister the vehicle. It is also used to assistyour dealer when ordering parts or refer-ring to special service information.

Engine Serial Number

60G128

The engine serial number is stamped onthe cylinder block as shown in the aboveillustration.

EXAMPLE (for some vehicles)

Jacking Instructions: 5

10-2

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J23-03E

Safety Certification Label

52D059

This label contains important safety-related information about your vehicle. Thelabel is located on the driver’s door lock pil-lar.

Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.)

60A412

The EPA emission compliance label islocated under the hood.

WarrantiesThe warranties covering your vehicle areexplained in a separate New Vehicle War-ranty Information booklet given to you atthe time of sale. Please read this bookletcarefully so you can understand your rightsand responsibilities.

For U.S.A.The following warranties are provided withyour vehicle:• New Vehicle Limited Warranty• Limited Warranty For SUZUKI Parts or

Accessories• Emission Components Defect Warranty• Emission Performance Warranty

EXAMPLE


10-3

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J23-03E

On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data RecordersYour vehicle is equipped with on-boardcomputer systems which monitor andcontrol several aspects of vehicle per-formance, including the following:• Emission-related components and

engine parameters such as enginespeed and throttle position are moni-tored to provide emissions controland to provide optimum fuel econ-omy. Your vehicle also has an on-board diagnostic system which mon-itors and records information aboutemission-related malfunctions.

• Signals from various sensors aremonitored to provide air bag deploy-ment.

• If your vehicle is equipped withantilock brakes, conditions such asvehicle speed and brake perfor-mance are monitored, so that theABS system can provide effectiveantilock braking. If your vehicle hasan Electronic Stability Program(ESP®) system, conditions such asyaw rate, lateral acceleration, andbrake fluid pressure are monitored,so that the ESP® system can helpthe driver control the vehicle in diffi-cult driving situations.

Some information may be stored bythe on-board computers during normal

operation of the vehicle. This storedinformation can assist technicians inrepairing the vehicle when malfunc-tions occur. Other information is storedonly in the event of crash, by computersystems that are commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDRs).

In a crash event, EDRs such as theAirbag Sensing and Diagnostic Mod-ule (SDM) in your vehicle may recordinformation about the condition of thevehicle and how it was operated, suchas data related to airbag readiness,airbag performance, safety belt usage,and the severity of the collision. Thesedata can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur and lead tothe designing of safer vehicles. TheSDM in your vehicle does not collector store personal information.

To read the stored information, specialequipment is needed and access tothe vehicle or storage device isrequired. SUZUKI will not access infor-mation about a crash event or share itwith others other than with the consentof the vehicle owner or lessee, inresponse to an official request fromthe police or similar government office,as part of SUZUKI’s defense of litiga-tion through the discovery process, oras required by law.

In addition, once SUZUKI collects orreceives data, SUZUKI may use thedata for research conducted bySUZUKI, make the data available foroutside research if need is shown andconfidentiality is assured, or makesummary data which does not identifyspecific vehicles available for outsideresearch.

Others, such as law enforcement per-sonnel, may have access to the spe-cial equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to thevehicle or storage device.


10-4

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J23-03E

Reporting Safety DefectsIf you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying American Suzuki Motor Corp.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or American Suzuki MotorCorp.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or writeto: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Ave., SE., Washington, D.C.20590. You can also obtain other infor-mation about motor vehicle safetyfrom http://www.safercar.gov.

To contact American Suzuki, ownersin the continental United States cancall toll-free 1-800-934-0934, or writeto:

American Suzuki Motor CorporationAutomotive Customer Relations3251 East Imperial HighwayBrea, CA 92821-6795

For owners outside the continentalUnited States, please refer to the dis-tributor’s address listed in your War-ranty Information booklet.

For vehicles registered for use andprincipally operated in Canada pleasecontact Suzuki Canada Inc. at 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or write to:


Jacking Instructions: 5Jump Starting Instructions: 7

10-5

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J23-03E

MEMO

Jump Starting Instructions: 7Towing a Disabled Vehicle: 6

11-1

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J23-03E

11


80J101

COLOR/SIZE (AMPS) PROTECTED CIRCUIT

In engine compartment

MAIN FUSE BOX

(1) BLACK (80) All electric load

(2) RED (50) Power window, Ignition, Wiper, Starter

(3) RED (50) Tail light, Rear defogger, Door lock, Hazard/Horn, Dome

(4) – Blank

(5) – Blank

(6) BLUE (15) Head light (Right) fuse

(7) BLUE (15) Head light (Left) fuse

(8) YELLOW (20) Front fog light fuse

(9) – Blank

(10) GREEN (40) ABS motor fuse

(1)

(2) (3)

(28)

(27)(26)(25)

(6) (7) (9) (11)

(15) (16) (17) (18) (19)

(24)

(8)(4) (5) (10)

(22)(21)

(23)

(20)

(12) (13) (14)

(30)

(29)

Fuses and Protected Circuits: 7

11-2


80J23-03E

80J101



MAIN FUSE BOX

(11) PINK (30) Radiator fan fuse

(12) PINK (30) ABS solenoid fuse

(13) PINK (30) Starting motor fuse

(14) RED (50) Ignition switch fuse

(15) PINK (30) Blower fan fuse

(16) YELLOW (20) Air compressor fuse

(17) BLUE (15) Throttle motor fuse

(18) BLUE (15) Automatic transaxle fuse

(19) BLUE (15) Fuel injection fuse

(20) – Automatic transaxle relay

(1)

(2) (3)

(28)

(27)(26)(25)

(6) (7) (9) (11)

(15) (16) (17) (18) (19)

(24)

(8)(4) (5) (10)

(22)(21)

(23)

(20)

(12) (13) (14)

(30)

(29)


11-3


80J23-03E

80J101



MAIN FUSE BOX

(21) – Air compressor relay

(22) – Fuel pump relay

(23) – Condensor fan relay

(24) – Front fog light relay

(25) – Throttle motor relay

(26) – FI MAIN relay

(27) – Starting motor relay

(28) – Radiator fan relay



(1)

(2) (3)

(28)

(27)(26)(25)

(6) (7) (9) (11)

(15) (16) (17) (18) (19)

(24)

(8)(4) (5) (10)

(22)(21)

(23)

(20)

(12) (13) (14)

(30)

(29)


11-4


80J23-03E

SX4

80J053

COLOR/SIZE (AMPS) FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT

Under the dashboardFUSE

BOX

(1) BLUE (15) RR WIP Rear wiper

(2) BLUE (15) IG COIL Ignition coil

(3) RED (10) BACK Back-up light

(4) RED (10) MTR Meter

(5) BLUE (15) ACC Accessory

(6) BLUE (15) ACC2 Accessory 2

(7) PINK (30) P/W Power window

(8) GREEN (30) WIP Wiper

(9) RED (10) IG1 SIG IG1 SIG

(10) BLUE (15) A/B Air bag

(11) RED (10) ABS Anti-lock brake system

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)

(7)


11-5


80J23-03E

80J053



BOX

(12) BLUE (15) 4WD 4WD

(13) RED (10) STOP Stop light

(14) YELLOW (20) D/L Door lock

(15) RED (10) RR FOG Rear fog light

(16) RED (10) ST SIG ST SIG

(17) BLUE (15) S/H Seat heater


(19) RED (10) TAIL Tail light

(20) BLUE (15) DOME Dome

(21) GREEN (30) RR DEF Rear defogger

(22) BLUE (15) HORN HAZ Horn/Hazard

(23) – – Blank

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)

(7)

11-6


80J23-03E

SX4 SEDAN

80JC003



BOX

(1) BLUE (15) RR WIP Rear wiper

(2) BLUE (15) IG COIL Ignition coil

(3) RED (10) BACK Back-up light

(4) RED (10) MTR Meter

(5) BLUE (15) ACC Accessory

(6) BLUE (15) ACC2 Accessory 2

(7) PINK (30) P/W Power window

(8) GREEN (30) WIP Wiper


(10) BLUE (15) A/B Air bag

(11) RED (10) ABS Anti-lock brake system

(12) – – Blank

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)

(21)

(24)

(14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (22) (23)

(7)

11-7


80J23-03E

80JC003



BOX

(13) RED (10) STOP Stop light

(14) YELLOW (20) D/L Door lock

(15) RED (10) RR FOG Rear fog light

(16) RED (10) ST SIG ST SIG

(17) BLUE (15) S/H Seat heater


(19) RED (10) TAIL Tail light

(20) BLUE (15) DOME Dome


(22) BLUE (15) HORN HAZ Horn/Hazard

(23) – – Blank


(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)

(21)

(24)

(14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (22) (23)

(7)

11-8


80J23-03E

MEMO

12-1

SPECIFICATIONS

80J23-03E

12

SPECIFICATIONSNOTE:Specifications are subject to change with-out notice.

M/T: Manual transaxleCVT: Continuously variable transaxle

2WD: 2-wheel drivei-AWD: intelligent All Wheel Drive

ITEM: Dimensions UNIT: mm (in.) SX4 SX4 SEDANOverall length 4115 – 4135 (162.0 – 162.8) 4490 – 4510 (176.8 – 177.6)

Overall width 1730 – 1755 (68.1 – 69.1) 1730 (68.1)

Overall height 195 tire 1575 (62.0) 1545 (60.8)205 tire 1605 (63.2) 1545 (60.8)

Wheelbase 2500 (98.4)

Track Front 1500 (59.1)Rear 1495 (58.9)

Ground clearance 195 tire 165 (6.5)

205 tire 175 (6.9) 160 (6.3)

ITEM: Weight

Gross axle weight ratingSee the safety certification label and the tire information label whichare located on the driver’s door lock pillar.Gross vehicle weight rating

Vehicle capacity weight

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11

12-2

SPECIFICATIONS

80J23-03E

ITEM: Engine

Type J20B (16V DOHC)

Number of cylinders 4

Bore 84.0 mm (3.31 in.)

Stroke 90.0 mm (3.54 in.)

Piston displacement 1995 cm3 (1995cc, 121.7 cu.in)

Compression ratio 10.2 : 1

ITEM: Electrical

Ignition timing 3° – 17° B.T.D.C. at idle speed

Standard spark plug NGK SILFR5A11

Battery DELKOR 24-700 12V

Fuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” and “FUSES AND PRO-TECTED CIRCUITS” sections.

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11

12-3

SPECIFICATIONS

80J23-03E

ITEM: Light WATTAGE BULB No.Headlight 12V 65/55W HB5Front fog light 12V 55W H11

Front turn signal light 12V 21W WY21W

Rear turn signal light 12V 21W WY21WPosition light 12V 5W 168

Brake/tail light 12V 21/5W W21/5W

License plate light 12V 5W W5WReversing light 12V 21W W21W

Dome light 12V 10W –

Luggage compartment light 12V 5W –Spot light 12V 8W –

High mount stop light SX4 12V 5W W5W

SX4 SEDAN 12V18W W16WSide marker light 12V 5W 168

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11

12-4

SPECIFICATIONS

80J23-03E

ITEM: Wheel

Tire size, front and rear SX4 P195/65R15, P205/60R16, P205/50R17

SX4 SEDAN P195/65R15, P205/50R17

Tire pressure For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information Label locatedon the driver’s door lock pillar.

ITEM: Steering

Toe IN 1.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.0393 ± 0.0393 in.)

Camber angle P195/65R15, P205/60R16 –0° 10’ ± 1°

P205/50R17 –0° 17’ ± 1°

Caster angle P195/65R15, P205/60R16 3° 40’ ± 2°

P205/50R17 3° 46’ ± 2°

ITEM: Capacities

Coolant (including reserve tank) M/T 7.1 L (15.0 US pt)

CVT 7.0 L (14.8 US pt)

Fuel tank 2WD 50 L (13.2 US gal)

i-AWD 45 L (11.9 US gal)

Engine oil (replaced with filter) 4.5 L (4.7 quarts)

Transaxle oil Manual transaxle: 2.5 L (5.3 US pt)

CVT: 9.44 L (19.9 US pt) (when overhauling)

Rear differential oil 0.8 L (1.7 US pt)

Transfer gear box oil 0.6 L (1.2 US pt)

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11

13-1

INDEX

13

80J23-03E

INDEXSymbols“CRUISE” Indicator Light.................................................... 2-66“ESP OFF” Indicator Light......................................... 2-63, 3-25“ESP” (Electronic Stability Program) Warning Light ....... 2-63“ESP” Warning Light........................................................... 3-25“SET” Indicator Light .......................................................... 2-66AAccelerator Pedal .................................................................. 3-8Accessory Socket................................................................ 5-47Adding Coolant .................................................................... 7-15Adjusting Seat Position ...................................................... 2-21Adjusting Seatbacks ........................................................... 2-22AIR BAG Light...................................................................... 2-65Air Cleaner............................................................................ 7-16Air Conditioning System..................................................... 7-50All Seat Belts........................................................................ 2-31Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......................................... 3-21Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light ................. 2-62Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ....................................... 3-24Armrest ................................................................................. 5-51Assist Grips.......................................................................... 5-48Audio Systems..................................................................... 5-15Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System (Climate Control).................................................................... 5-9Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)................................... 2-30Average fuel consumption.................................................. 2-72BBasic Operations ................................................................. 5-18Battery .................................................................................. 7-35

Brake Assist System............................................................3-21Brake Fluid............................................................................7-21Brake Pedal....................................................................3-8, 7-22Brake System Warning Light ..............................................2-61Brakes ...................................................................................7-21Braking..................................................................................3-20Break-In...................................................................................4-1Bulb Replacement................................................................7-40CCatalytic Converter ................................................................4-1Changing Engine Oil and Filter...........................................7-12Changing Wheels ...................................................................8-4Charging Light......................................................................2-64Child Lock System (rear doors)............................................2-3Child Restraint Systems......................................................2-36Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray.............................................5-47Clock .....................................................................................2-75Clutch Pedal ..................................................................3-8, 7-19Compact Spare Tire .............................................................7-31Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT).............................3-11Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) Fluid ...................7-20Coolant Level Check............................................................7-15Coolant Replacement ..........................................................7-16Corrosion Prevention ............................................................9-1Cruise Control ......................................................................3-18Cup Holder and Storage Area .............................................5-49DDaily Inspection Checklist.....................................................3-1Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) Indicator Light ................2-68Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) System ............................2-76Door Locks .............................................................................2-1

13-2

INDEX

80J23-03E

Drive Belt .............................................................................. 7-11Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light...................................... 2-64Driving on Hills ...................................................................... 4-3Driving on Slippery Roads.................................................... 4-4Driving range........................................................................ 2-72EElectronic Stability Program (ESP®) .................................. 3-23Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................................. 2-30Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ........................... 10-2Engine Block Heater.............................................................. 3-9Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-14Engine Hood......................................................................... 5-44Engine Oil and Filter............................................................ 7-11Engine Serial Number ......................................................... 10-1Exhaust Gas Warning............................................................ 3-1FFloor Mats............................................................................. 5-51Fluid Level Check ................................................................ 7-20Folding Rear Seats .............................................................. 2-26Frame Hooks ........................................................................ 5-56Front Air Bags...................................................................... 2-49Front Fog Light Switch........................................................ 2-77Front Seat Back Pocket....................................................... 5-50Front Seat Heater................................................................. 2-23Front Seats ........................................................................... 2-21Fuel Filler Cap ...................................................................... 5-43Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-69Fuel Pump Labeling............................................................... 1-1Fuel Recommendation .......................................................... 1-1Full Wheel Cover.................................................................... 8-4Fuses .................................................................................... 7-36

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS .................................11-1Fuses in the Engine Compartment.....................................7-36Fuses under the Dash Board ..............................................7-38GGasoline Containing MTBE ...................................................1-1Gasoline/Ethanol blends .......................................................1-1Gasoline/Methanol blends.....................................................1-1Gear Oil .................................................................................7-18Gear Oil Level Check ...........................................................7-19Gear Oil Replacement..........................................................7-19GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOLOGY ................................7-32Glove Box .............................................................................5-49HHazard Warning Switch .......................................................2-78Head Restraints...........................................................2-22, 2-24Headlight Aiming..................................................................7-39Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors Switch ......................................................................2-81Heating and Air Conditioning System..................................5-1Heating System ......................................................................5-2High Beam Indicator Light ..................................................2-67Highway Driving .....................................................................4-3Horn.......................................................................................2-81How the ABS Works.............................................................3-23IIdentification Numbers ........................................................10-1If the Engine is Flooded.........................................................8-7If the Engine Overheats .........................................................8-7If the Starter Does Not Operate.............................................8-6If You Cannot Shift CVT Gearshift Lever Out of “P” (PARK)............................................................................3-15

13-3

INDEX

80J23-03E

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck .................................................... 4-4Ignition Key Reminder........................................................... 2-1Ignition Switch ....................................................................... 3-2Illumination control setting................................................. 2-74Illumination Indicator Light................................................. 2-67Improving Fuel Economy...................................................... 4-2Information display.............................................................. 2-70Inside Rearview Mirror ........................................................ 2-19Installation of Child Restraint with Top Strap................... 2-44Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts (child restraint with no top strap)....................................... 2-38Installation with the LATCH System .................................. 2-40Instantaneous Fuel Consumption...................................... 2-70Instrument Cluster............................................................... 2-59intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) AUTO Indicator Light ...................................................................................... 2-67intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) LOCK Indicator Light ...................................................................................... 2-68Interior Light Switch ............................................................ 5-45JJacking Instructions.............................................................. 8-2Jump Starting Instructions ................................................... 8-5KKeyless Entry System Transmitter .................................... 2-13Keyless Start System Indicator Light ................................ 2-66Keyless Start System Remote Controller............................ 2-6Keys ........................................................................................ 2-1LLap-Shoulder Belt................................................................ 2-30Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-75Lighting Operation............................................................... 2-76

Lights “On” reminder ..........................................................2-76Listening to a CD..................................................................5-22Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer (Option) .................................................................................5-34Listening to a XM Satellite Radio (Option).........................5-31Listening to Audio for AUX (Option) ..................................5-33Listening to the Radio .........................................................5-20Low Fuel Warning Light ......................................................2-66Low Tire Pressure Warning Light..............................2-60, 3-26Luggage Compartment Board ............................................5-53Luggage Compartment Cover.............................................5-52Luggage Compartment Light ..............................................5-46MMaintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions ..............................................................................7-7Maintenance Schedule ..........................................................7-2Malfunction Indicator Light .................................................2-65Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ....................5-5Manual Transaxle .................................................................3-10Mirrors...................................................................................2-19OOdometer ..............................................................................2-74Oil Level Check ....................................................................7-11Oil Pressure Light ................................................................2-64On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data Recorders .............................................................................10-3Open Door Warning Light ...................................................2-66Outside Rearview Mirrors....................................................2-20PParking Brake Lever .....................................................3-6, 7-23Pedals......................................................................................3-7

13-4

INDEX

80J23-03E

Periodic Maintenance Schedule........................................... 7-3Power Door Locking System ................................................ 2-2Power Mirror Control........................................................... 2-20Power Steering..................................................................... 7-24Power Steering Fluid ........................................................... 7-24Power Window Controls ..................................................... 2-17Power-Assisted Brakes....................................................... 3-21RRadio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-15Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-24Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch .................................. 2-80Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks.................................... 7-14Refilling................................................................................. 7-12Remote Audio Controls....................................................... 5-37Replace the Oil Filter ........................................................... 7-13Replacing Tires and/or Wheels .......................................... 3-29Reporting Safety Defects .................................................... 10-4Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors ...................................... 5-55SSafety Certification Label.................................................... 10-2Seat Adjustment .................................................................. 2-21Seat Belt Extender ............................................................... 2-45Seat Belt Hanger .................................................................. 2-34Seat Belt Inspection ............................................................ 2-35Seat Belt Pretensioner System........................................... 2-46Seat Belt Reminder.............................................................. 2-32Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems............................ 2-28Selection of Coolant ............................................................ 7-14Shopping Hook .................................................................... 5-51Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster...................................... 2-34Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air Bags .......................... 2-50

Side Door Locks.....................................................................2-1SLIP Indicator Light ....................................................2-62, 3-25Snow Tires ............................................................................7-32Spark Plugs ..........................................................................7-16SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................12-1Specified Fluid......................................................................7-20Specified Gear Oil ................................................................7-18Specified Oil .........................................................................7-11Speedometer ........................................................................2-68Spot Light .............................................................................5-47Stability Control System......................................................3-24Starting the Engine ................................................................3-8Steering Wheel .....................................................................7-23Sun Visor ..............................................................................5-45Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ........................2-47TTachometer...........................................................................2-69Tailgate....................................................................................2-3Temperature Gauge .............................................................2-70Theft Deterrent Light............................................................2-17Thermometer ........................................................................2-73Tilt Steering Lock Lever ......................................................2-81Tire Chains..............................................................................4-5Tire Changing Tool ................................................................8-1Tire Inflation Pressure .........................................................7-26Tire Inspection......................................................................7-28Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .........................3-26Tire Rotation .........................................................................7-30Tire Sidewall Labeling .........................................................7-24Tire Size ................................................................................7-25Tires.......................................................................................7-24

13-5

INDEX

80J23-03E

Towing a Disabled Vehicle.................................................... 8-6Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) ......................... 6-2Traction Control System ..................................................... 3-24Trailer Towing ........................................................................ 6-2Transaxle selector position indicator ................................ 2-73Trip meter ............................................................................. 2-72Troubleshooting .................................................................. 5-41Trunk Lid ................................................................................ 2-4Trunk Light ........................................................................... 5-46Turn Signal Control Lever................................................... 2-77Turn Signal Indicators......................................................... 2-67Turn Signal Operation ......................................................... 2-77UUniform Tire Quality Grading ............................................. 7-29Using the 2WD/i-AWD (intelligent All Wheel Drive) Switch ................................................................................... 3-16Using the Transaxle............................................................. 3-10VVehicle Cleaning .................................................................... 9-3Vehicle Identification Number ............................................ 10-1Vehicle Loading ............................................................ 6-1, 7-33Vehicle With Keyless Start System...................................... 3-4Vehicle Without Keyless Start System ................................ 3-3WWarning and Indicator Lights ............................................. 2-60Warranties ............................................................................ 10-2Washing.................................................................................. 9-4Waxing .................................................................................... 9-5Windows ............................................................................... 2-17Windshield Washer.............................................................. 2-79Windshield Washer Fluid .................................................... 7-50

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever .................................2-78Windshield Wipers ...............................................................2-79Wiper Blades ........................................................................7-46

13-6

INDEX

80J23-03E

MEMO

80J23-03E

Prepared by

June, 2009

Part No. 99011-80J23-03E

Printed in Japan

TP294

This owner’s manual applies to the SX4 series

Documents

Transcript of This owner’s manual applies to the SX4 series